WO2007022241A2 - Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands - Google Patents

Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007022241A2
WO2007022241A2 PCT/US2006/031945 US2006031945W WO2007022241A2 WO 2007022241 A2 WO2007022241 A2 WO 2007022241A2 US 2006031945 W US2006031945 W US 2006031945W WO 2007022241 A2 WO2007022241 A2 WO 2007022241A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
alkyl
heteroaryl
heterocyclyl
aryl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2006/031945
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007022241A3 (en
Inventor
Yongqi Deng
Patrick J. Curran
Gerald W. Shipps, Jr.
Lianyun Zhao
M. Arshad Siddiqui
Janeta Popovici-Muller
Jose S. Duca
Alan W. Hruza
Thierry O. Fischmann
Vincent S. Madison
Rumin Zhang
Charles Wayne Mcnemar
Todd W. Mayhood
William T. Windsor
Emma M. Lees
David A. Parry
Original Assignee
Schering Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Schering Corporation filed Critical Schering Corporation
Priority to CA002619706A priority Critical patent/CA2619706A1/en
Priority to EP06801601.3A priority patent/EP1931657B1/en
Priority to MX2008002363A priority patent/MX2008002363A/en
Priority to JP2008527091A priority patent/JP4976394B2/en
Publication of WO2007022241A2 publication Critical patent/WO2007022241A2/en
Publication of WO2007022241A3 publication Critical patent/WO2007022241A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/18—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/38—Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D215/42—Nitrogen atoms attached in position 4
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/48—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/48—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C07D215/50—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen attached in position 4
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing aromatic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing aromatic rings

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel quinoline compounds useful as protein kinase inhibitors (such as for example, the inhibitors of the cyclin-dependent kinases, mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK/ERK), glycogen synthase kinase 3(GSK3beta) and the like), pharmaceutical compositions containing the compounds, and methods of treatment using the compounds and compositions to treat diseases such as, for example, cancer, inflammation, arthritis, viral diseases, neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease, cardiovascular diseases, and fungal diseases.
  • the compounds disclosed herein are especially useful as cyclin dependent kinase inhibitors, such as, for example, CDK-1 and CDK-2 inhibitors.
  • Protein phosphorylation is one of the main post translational mechanisms used to control cellular function. Protein kinases catalyze the phosphorylation of serine, threonine and tyrosine residues using either ATP or GTP.
  • CDK cyclin dependent kinase
  • CDK1 CDK1
  • Cdc2 CDK1
  • Cdc2 CDK1
  • Cdc2 CDK1
  • the invention relates to novel compounds and compositions including those compounds as well as methods of using the compounds.
  • the compounds are heterocyclic molecules that are useful in therapeutic applications, including modulation of disease or disease symptoms in a subject (for example, cat, dog, horse, or human). These diseases include Alzheimer's disease, cancer, diabetes, and inflammation.
  • the compounds (including stereoisomers thereof) are synthesized either singly or in a combinatorial fashion to give structurally and stereochemical ⁇ / diverse libraries of compounds.
  • CDK-2 inhibition by the compounds included in this invention was demonstrated and quantified by measuring the binding affinity (Ki) between these compounds and CDK-2 using a fluorescence polarization displacement assay.
  • the compounds are Quinoline compounds that are substituted with aryl amido moieties.
  • R 0 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl or heterocyclylalkyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from
  • R 2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, carboxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylsulfonamido, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -CO 2 R 6 , -N(R 6 )SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)NHSO 2 R 6 , -SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)N(R 6 ) 2 , or -C(O)NHC(R 6 )C(O)R 6 ; where each of said R 6 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylhetero
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, arylcycloalkyl, aryloxyaryl, aminoaryl, aminoalkylaryl, alkyloxa, alkylthia, cyanoalkynyl, cyanoaryl, cycloalkyl, haloaryl, haloalkylaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclyialkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, hydroxyalkyl, thiaalkyl, heteroaryl, nitroaryl, oxaalkyl, oxaalkynyl-CO 2 R 7 , -N(R 7 )SO 2 R 7 , -
  • Q 2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkyloxo, alkylsulfonyl, aryl, arylsulfonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, haloaryl, hydroxysulfonyl, alkylaryi, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, aikyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy, - C(O)NH
  • Q 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylamido, alkyloxo, alkylsulfonyl, alkoxyoxo, alkylaryi, alkylheteroaryl, amino, aryloxy, aryl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, halo, alkoxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cyano, dialkylamino, dialkylaminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, haloaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxysulfonyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, hydroxyheterocyclyl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, oxo
  • compositions formulated for administration by an appropriate route and means containing effective concentrations of one or more of the compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, that deliver amounts effective for the treatment, prevention, or amelioration of one or more symptoms of diseases or disorders that are modulated or otherwise affected by CDK-2, are also provided.
  • the effective amounts and concentrations are effective for ameliorating any of the symptoms of any of the diseases or disorders.
  • Methods of treatment, prevention, or amelioration of one or more symptoms of a disease or disorder that is modulated or otherwise affected by CDK-2 is implicated, are provided.
  • Such methods include methods of treatment, prevention and amelioration of one or more symptoms of inflammatory disease, neurodegenerative disease, cancer and diabetes using one or more of the compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.
  • Non-limiting xamples of inflammatory disease are acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, and adult respiratory distress syndrome.
  • Non-limiting examples of neurodegenerative disease are acute Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, cerebral ischemia, and other neurodegenerative diseases.
  • Non-limiting examples of the diabetes are diabetes mellitus and diabetes insipidus, e.g., type 1 diabetes and type 2 diabetes.
  • effective amounts of the compounds or compositions containing therapeutically effective concentrations of the compounds are formulated for systemic delivery, including parenteral, oral, or intravenous delivery, or for local or topical application, for the treatment of CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders, including, but not limited to, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, cancer, diabetes, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, adult respiratory distress syndrome, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, cerebral ischemia, diabetes mellitus, diabetes insipidus, type 1 diabetes, type 2 diabetes, breast cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the ovaries, cancer of the colon, lung cancer, brain cancer, cancer of the larynx, cancer of the lymphatic system, cancer of the genito-urinary tract including the bladder and the prostate, bone cancer and cancer of the pancreas, are administered to an individual exhibiting the symptoms of these diseases or disorders.
  • CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders including, but not limited to, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, cancer, diabetes, acute
  • the amounts are effective to ameliorate or eliminate one or more symptoms of the diseases or disorders.
  • Articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a compound or composition, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, provided herein, which is effective for modulating the activity of CDK-2, mediated diseases or disorders are provided, within the packaging material, and a label that indicates that the compound or composition, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, is used for modulating the activity of CDK-2, mediated diseases or disorders, are provided.
  • the compounds according to the invention have pharmacological properties; in particular, the compounds of Formula I can be inhibitors of protein kinases such as, for example, the inhibitors of the cyclin-dependent kinases, mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK/ERK), glycogen synthase kinase 3(GSK3beta) and the like.
  • the cyclin dependent kinases (CDKs) include, for example, CDC2 (CDK1 ), CDK2, CDK4, CDK5, CDK6, CDK7 and CDK8.
  • novel compounds of Formula I are expected to be useful in the therapy of proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease.
  • proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease.
  • proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease.
  • the compounds of Formula I can be useful in the treatment of a variety of cancers, including (but not limited to) the following: carcinoma, including that of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, including small cell lung cancer, esophagus, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid, prostate, and skin, including squamous cell carcinoma; hematopoietic tumors of lymphoid lineage, including leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma, T- cell lymphoma, Hodgkins lymphoma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma and Burkett's lymphoma; hematopoietic tumors of myeloid lineage, including acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, myelodysplastic syndrome and promyelocytic leukemia; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosar
  • inhibitors could act as reversible cytostatic agents which may be useful in the treatment of any disease process which features abnormal cellular proliferation, e.g., benign prostate hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neuro- fibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, and fungal infections.
  • any disease process e.g., benign prostate hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neuro- fibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, and fungal infections.
  • Compounds of Formula I can also be useful in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, as suggested by the recent finding that CDK5 is involved in the phosphorylation of tau protein (J. Biochem, (1995) 117, 741-749).
  • Compounds of Formula I may induce or inhibit apoptosis.
  • the apoptotic response is aberrant in a variety of human diseases.
  • Compounds of Formula I, as modulators of apoptosis, will be useful in the treatment of cancer (including but not limited to those types mentioned hereinabove), viral infections (including but not limited to herpevirus, poxvirus, Epstein- Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus), prevention of AIDS development in HIV-infected individuals, autoimmune diseases (including but not limited to systemic lupus, erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, and autoimmune diabetes mellitus), neurodegenerative disorders (including but not limited to Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy and cerebellar degeneration), mye
  • Compounds of Formula I can modulate the level of cellular RNA and DNA synthesis. These agents would therefore be useful in the treatment of viral infections (including but not limited to HIV, human papilloma virus, herpesvirus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus).
  • viral infections including but not limited to HIV, human papilloma virus, herpesvirus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus.
  • Chemoprevention is defined as inhibiting the development of invasive cancer by either blocking the initiating mutagenic event or by blocking the progression of pre-malignant cells that have already suffered an insult or inhibiting tumor relapse.
  • Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in inhibiting tumor angiogenesis and metastasis.
  • Compounds of Formula I may also act as inhibitors of other protein kinases, e.g., protein kinase C, her2, raf 1 , MEK1 , MAP kinase, EGF receptor, PDGF receptor, IGF receptor, PI3 kinase, weel kinase, Src, AbI and thus be effective in the treatment of diseases associated with other protein kinases.
  • protein kinase C her2, raf 1 , MEK1 , MAP kinase, EGF receptor, PDGF receptor, IGF receptor, PI3 kinase, weel kinase, Src, AbI and thus be effective in the treatment of diseases associated with other protein kinases.
  • another aspect of this invention is a method of treating a mammal (e.g., human) having a disease or condition associated with the CDKs by administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound to the mammal.
  • a mammal e.g., human
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound is administered to the mammal.
  • compositions which comprise at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Preferred alkyl groups contain about 1 to about 12 carbon atoms in the chain. More preferred alkyl groups contain about 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, are attached to a linear alkyl chain. "Lower alkyl” means a group having about 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain which may be straight or branched.
  • Alkyl may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted by one or more substituents which may be the same or different, each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, -NH(alkyl), - NH(cycloalkyl), -N(alkyl) 2 , -O-C(O)-alkyl, -O-C(O)-aryl, -O-C(O)-cycloalkyl, carboxy and -C(O)O-alkyl.
  • suitable alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl and t-butyl.
  • Alkenyl means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond and which may be straight or branched and comprising about 2 to about 15 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • Preferred alkenyl groups have about 2 to about 12 carbon atoms in the chain; and more preferably about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, are attached to a linear alkenyl chain.
  • “Lower alkenyl” means about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain which may be straight or branched.
  • alkenyl may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted by one or more substituents which may be the same or different, each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl. aryl, cycloalkyl, cyano, alkoxy and -S(alkyl).
  • suitable alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, 3-methylbut-2-enyl, n-pentenyl, octenyl and decenyl.
  • Alkylene means a difunctional group obtained by removal of a hydrogen atom from an alkyl group that is defined above.
  • alkylene include methylene, ethylene and propylene.
  • Alkenylene means a difunctional group obtained by removal of a hydrogen from an alkenyl group that is defined above.
  • Alkynyl means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and which may be straight or branched and comprising about 2 to about 15 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • Preferred alkynyl groups have about 2 to about 12 carbon atoms in the chain; and more preferably about 2 to about 4 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, are attached to a linear alkynyl chain.
  • “Lower alkynyl” means about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain which may be straight or branched.
  • alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, 2-butynyl and 3-methylbutynyl.
  • Alkynyl may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted by one or more substituents which may be the same or different, each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl.
  • Aryl means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, preferably about 6 to about 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group can be optionally substituted with one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined herein.
  • suitable aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Heteroaryl means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the ring atoms is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. Preferred heteroaryls contain about 5 to about 6 ring atoms.
  • the "heteroaryl” can be optionally substituted by one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined herein.
  • the prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heteroaryl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively, is present as a ring atom.
  • heteroaryl may also include a heteroaryl as defined above fused to an aryl as defined above.
  • suitable heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridone (including N- substituted pyridones), isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, furazanyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-thiadiazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, oxindolyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyridinyl, imidazo[2,1-b]thiazolyl, benzofurazan
  • Aralkyl or “arylalkyl” means an aryl-alkyl- group in which the aryl and alkyl are as previously described. Preferred aralkyls comprise a lower alkyl group. Non- limiting examples of suitable aralkyl groups include benzyl, 2-phenethyl and naphthalenylmethyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl.
  • Alkylaryl means an alkyl-aryl- group in which the alkyl and aryl are as previously described. Preferred alkylaryls comprise a lower alkyl group. Non-limiting example of a suitable alkylaryl group is tolyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the aryl.
  • Cycloalkyl means a non-aromatic mono- or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 carbon atoms. Preferred cycloalkyl rings contain about 5 to about 7 ring atoms.
  • the cycloalkyl can be optionally substituted with one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined above.
  • suitable monocyclic cycloalkyls include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and the like.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable multicyclic cycloalkyls include 1-decalinyl, norbomyl, adamantyl and the like.
  • Cycloalkylalkyl means a cycloalkyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable cycloalkylalkyls include cyclohexylmethyl, adamantylmethyl and the like.
  • Cycloalkenyl means a non-aromatic mono or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 carbon atoms which contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • Preferred cycloalkenyl rings contain about 5 to about 7 ring atoms.
  • the cycloalkenyl can be optionally substituted with one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined above.
  • suitable monocyclic cycloalkenyls include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohepta-1 ,3-dienyl, and the like.
  • Non-limiting example of a suitable multicyclic cycloalkenyl is norbomylenyl.
  • Cycloalkenylalkyl means a cycloalkenyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core.
  • suitable cycloalkenylalkyls include cyclopentenylmethyl, cyclohexenylmethyl and the like.
  • Halogen means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. Preferred are fluorine, chlorine and bromine.
  • Ring system substituent means a substituent attached to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring system which, for example, replaces an available hydrogen on the ring system.
  • Ring system substituents may be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, acyl, aroyl, halo, nitro, cyano, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, aralkylthio, heteroaralkylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, -O-C(O)-alkyl, -O-C(
  • Ring system substituent may also mean a single moiety which simultaneously replaces two available hydrogens on two adjacent carbon atoms (one H on each carbon) on a ring system.
  • Examples of such moiety are methylene dioxy, ethylenedioxy, -C(CHs) 2 - and the like which form moieties such as, for example:
  • Heteroarylalkyl means a heteroaryl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core.
  • suitable heteroaryls include 2-pyridinylmethyl, quinolinylmethyl and the like.
  • Heterocyclyl means a non-aromatic saturated monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. There are no adjacent oxygen and/or sulfur atoms present in the ring system.
  • Preferred heterocyclyls contain about 5 to about 6 ring atoms.
  • the prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heterocyclyl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively is present as a ring atom.
  • Any -NH in a heterocyclyl ring may exist protected such as, for example, as an -N(Boc), -N(CBz), -N(Tos) group and the like; such protections are also considered part of this invention.
  • the heterocyclyl can be optionally substituted by one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined herein.
  • the nitrogen or sulfur atom of the heterocyclyl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide, S-oxide or S 1 S- dioxide.
  • suitable monocyclic heterocyclyl rings include piperidyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, 1 ,4- dioxanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, lactam, lactone, and the like.
  • Heterocyclyl may also mean a single moiety (e.g., carbonyl) which simultaneously replaces two available hydrogens on the same carbon atom on a ring system.
  • Example of such moiety is pyrrolidone:
  • Heterocyclylalkyl means a heterocyclyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core.
  • suitable heterocyclylalkyls include piperidinylmethyl, piperazinylmethyl and the like.
  • Heterocyclenyl means a non-aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, alone or in combination, and which contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond or carbon-nitrogen double bond. There are no adjacent oxygen and/or sulfur atoms present in the ring system.
  • Preferred heterocyclenyl rings contain about 5 to about 6 ring atoms.
  • the prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heterocyclenyl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively is present as a ring atom.
  • the heterocyclenyl can be optionally substituted by one or more ring system substituents, wherein "ring system substituent" is as defined above.
  • the nitrogen or sulfur atom of the heterocyclenyl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide, S-oxide or S,S-dioxide.
  • heterocyclenyl groups include 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydropyridinyl, 1 ,2-dihydropyridinyl, 1 ,4-dihydropyridinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 1 ,4,5,6-tetrahydropyrimidinyl, 2-pyrroIinyl, 3-pyrrolinyl, 2- imidazolinyl, 2-pyrazoiinyl, dihydroimidazolyl, dihydrooxazolyl, dihydrooxadiazolyl, dihydrothiazolyl, 3,4-dihydro-2H ⁇ pyranyl, dihydrofuranyl, fluorodihydrofuranyl, 7- oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiopyranyl, and the like.
  • Heterocyclenyl may also mean a single moiety
  • Heterocyclenylalkyl means a heterocyclenyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core. It should be noted that in hetero-atom containing ring systems of this invention, there are no hydroxyl groups on carbon atoms adjacent to a N, O or S, as well as there are no N or S groups on carbon adjacent to another heteroatom. Thus, for example, in the ring:
  • Alkynylalkyl means an alkynyl-alkyl- group in which the alkynyl and alkyl are as previously described. Preferred alkynylalkyls contain a lower alkynyl and a lower alkyl group. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkynylalkyl groups include propargylmethyl. "Heteroaralkyl” means a heteroaryl-alkyl- group in which the heteroaryl and alkyl are as previously described. Preferred heteroaralkyls contain a lower alkyl group. Non-limiting examples of suitable aralkyl groups include pyridylmethyl, and quinolin-3-ylmethyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl.
  • Hydroxyalkyl means a HO-alkyl- group in which alkyl is as previously defined. Preferred hydroxyalkyls contain lower alkyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable hydroxyalkyl groups include hydroxymethyl and 2-hydroxyethyl.
  • acyl means an H-C(O)-, alkyl-C(O)- or cycloalkyl-C(O)-, group in which the various groups are as previously described.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl.
  • Preferred acyls contain a lower alkyl.
  • suitable acyl groups include formyl, acetyl and propanoyl.
  • Aroyl means an aryl-C(O)- group in which the aryl group is as previously described.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl.
  • suitable groups include benzoyl and 1- naphthoyl.
  • Alkoxy means an alkyl-O- group in which the alkyl group is as previously described.
  • suitable alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy and n-butoxy.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.
  • Aryloxy means an aryl-O- group in which the aryl group is as previously described.
  • suitable aryloxy groups include phenoxy and naphthoxy.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.
  • Alkyloxy means an aralkyl-O- group in which the aralkyl group is as previously described.
  • suitable aralkyloxy groups include benzyloxy and 1- or 2-naphthalenemethoxy.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.
  • Alkylthio means an alkyl-S- group in which the alkyl group is as previously described.
  • suitable alkylthio groups include methylthio and ethylthio. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfur.
  • Arylthio means an aryl-S- group in which the aryl group is as previously described.
  • suitable arylthio groups include phenylthio and naphthylthio.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfur.
  • Alkylthio means an aralkyl-S- group in which the aralkyl group is as previously described.
  • Non-limiting example of a suitable aralkylthio group is benzylthio.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfur.
  • Alkoxycarbonyl means an alkyl-O-CO- group.
  • suitable alkoxycarbonyl groups include methoxycarbonyl and ethoxycarbonyl.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl.
  • Aryloxycarbonyl means an aryl-O-C(O)- group.
  • suitable aryloxycarbonyl groups include phenoxycarbonyl and naphthoxycarbonyl.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl.
  • Aralkoxycarbonyl means an aralkyl-O-C(O)- group.
  • Non-limiting example of a suitable aralkoxycarbonyl group is benzyloxycarbonyl.
  • the bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl.
  • Alkylsulfonyl means an alkyl-S(O 2 )- group. Preferred groups are those in which the alkyl group is lower alkyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfonyl.
  • Arylsulfonyl means an aryl-S(O 2 )- group. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfonyl.
  • substituted means that one or more hydrogens on the designated atom is replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency under the existing circumstances is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound. Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds.
  • stable compound' or “stable structure” is meant a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic agent.
  • purified refers to the physical state of said compound after being isolated from a synthetic process (e.g. from a reaction mixture), or natural source or combination thereof.
  • purified refers to the physical state of said compound after being obtained from a purification process or processes described herein or well known to the skilled artisan (e.g., chromatography, recrystallization and the like) , in sufficient purity to be characterizable by standard analytical techniques described herein or well known to the skilled artisan.
  • any carbon as well as heteroatom with unsatisfied valences in the text, schemes, examples and Tables herein is assumed to have the sufficient number of hydrogen atom(s) to satisfy the valences.
  • protecting groups When a functional group in a compound is termed "protected", this means that the group is in modified form to preclude undesired side reactions at the protected site when the compound is subjected to a reaction. Suitable protecting groups will be recognized by those with ordinary skill in the art as well as by reference to standard textbooks such as, for example, T. W. Greene et a/, Protective Groups in organic Synthesis (1991 ), Wiley, New York.
  • variable e.g., aryl, heterocycle, R 2 , etc.
  • its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence.
  • composition is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.
  • Prodrugs and solvates of the compounds of the invention are also contemplated herein. A discussion of prodrugs is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems (1987) 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, (1987) Edward B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press.
  • prodrug means a compound (e.g, a drug precursor) that is transformed in vivo to yield a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate of the compound.
  • the transformation may occur by various mechanisms (e.g., by metabolic or chemical processes), such as, for example, through hydrolysis in blood.
  • a discussion of the use of prodrugs is provided by T. Higuchi and W. Stella, "Pro- drugs as Novel Delivery Systems," Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, ed. Edward B. Roche, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987.
  • a prodrug can comprise an ester formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the acid group with a group such as, for example, (d-C ⁇ Jalkyl, (C 2 - Ci 2 )alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-(alkanoyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 9 carbon atoms, 1- methyl-1-(alkanoyloxy)-ethyl having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, 1 - (alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 7 carbon atoms, 1-methyl-1- (alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 5 to 8 carbon atoms, N- (alkoxycarbonyl)aminomethyl having from 3 to 9 carbon atoms, 1-(N- (alkoxycarbon
  • a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as, for example, (C 1 -Ce)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((Cr C 6 )alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((CrC 6 )alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (Cr C 6 )alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N-(CrC 6 )alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (Cr C 6 )alkanoyl, ⁇ -amino(CrC 4 )alkanyl, arylacyl and ⁇ -aminoacyl, or ⁇ -aminoacyl- ⁇ - aminoacyl, where each ⁇ -aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, P(O)(OH) 2 , -P(O)(O
  • a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of a hydrogen atom in the amine group with a group such as, for example, R-carbonyl, RO-carbonyl, NRR'-carbonyl where R and R' are each independently (CrCio)alkyl, (Cs-C 7 ) cycloalkyl, benzyl, or R- carbonyl is a natural ⁇ -aminoacyl or natural ⁇ -aminoacyl, — C(OH)C(O)OY 1 wherein Y 1 is H, (CrCe)alkyl or benzyl, — C(OY 2 )Y 3 wherein Y 2 is (CrC 4 ) alky!
  • R-carbonyl RO-carbonyl
  • NRR'-carbonyl where R and R' are each independently (CrCio)alkyl, (Cs-C 7 ) cycloalkyl, benzyl, or R- carbonyl is a natural ⁇
  • Y 3 is (C 1 - C 6 )alkyl, carboxy (CrC 6 )alkyl, amino(Ci-C 4 )alkyl or mono-N — or di-N,N-(Cr C 6 )alkylaminoalkyl, — C(Y 4 )Y 5 wherein Y 4 is H or methyl and Y 5 is mono-N — or di- N,N-(CrC 6 )alkylamino morpholino, piperidin-1-yl or pyrrolidin-1-yl, and the like.
  • One or more compounds of the invention may exist in unsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like, and it is intended that the invention embrace both solvated and unsolvated forms.
  • “Solvate” means a physical association of a compound of this invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. "Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include ethanolates, methanolates, and the like.
  • “Hydrate” is a solvate wherein the solvent molecule is H 2 O.
  • One or more compounds of the invention may optionally be converted to a solvate.
  • Preparation of solvates is generally known.
  • M. Caira et a/ J. Pharmaceutical Sci,, 93(3), 601-611 (2004) describe the preparation of the solvates of the antifungal fluconazole in ethyl acetate as well as from water.
  • Similar preparations of solvates, hemisolvate, hydrates and the like are described by E. C. van Tonder et al, AAPS PharmSciTech., 5(1), article 12 (2004); and A. L. Bingham et a/, Chem. Commun., 603-604 (2001 ).
  • a typical, non-limiting, process involves dissolving the inventive compound in desired amounts of the desired solvent (organic or water or mixtures thereof) at a higher than ambient temperature, and cooling the solution at a rate sufficient to form crystals which are then isolated by standard methods.
  • Analytical techniques such as, for example I. R. spectroscopy, show the presence of the solvent (or water) in the crystals as a solvate (or hydrate).
  • Effective amount or “therapeutically effective amount” is meant to describe an amount of compound or a composition of the present invention effective in inhibiting the above-noted diseases and thus producing the desired therapeutic, ameliorative, inhibitory or preventative effect.
  • the compounds of Formula I can form salts which are also within the scope of this invention.
  • salts denotes acidic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic acids, as well as basic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic bases.
  • a compound of Formula I contains both a basic moiety, such as, but not limited to a pyridine or imidazole, and an acidic moiety, such as, but not limited to a carboxylic acid, zwitterions ("inner salts") may be formed and are included within the term “salt(s)" as used herein.
  • Salts of the compounds of the Formula I may be formed, for example, by reacting a compound of Formula I with an amount of acid or base, such as an equivalent amount, in a medium such as one in which the salt precipitates or in an aqueous medium followed by lyophilization.
  • Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates, ascorbates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, fumarates, hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, hydroiodides, lactates, maleates, methanesulfonates, naphthalenesulfonates, nitrates, oxalates, phosphates, propionates, salicylates, succinates, sulfates, tartarates, thiocyanates, toluenesulfonates (also known as tosylates,) and the like.
  • Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts, salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as dicyclohexylamines, t-butyl amines, and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like.
  • Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quarternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g. methyl, ethyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g.
  • dimethyl, diethyl, and dibutyl sulfates dimethyl, diethyl, and dibutyl sulfates
  • long chain halides e.g. decyl, lauryl, and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides
  • aralkyl halides e.g. benzyl and phenethyl bromides
  • esters of the present compounds include the following groups: (1) carboxylic acid esters obtained by esterification of the hydroxy groups, in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the carboxylic acid portion of the ester grouping is selected from straight or branched chain alkyl (for example, acetyl, n- propyl, t-butyl, or n-butyl), alkoxyalkyl (for example, methoxymethyl), aralkyl (for example, benzyl), aryloxyalkyl (for example, phenoxymethyl), aryl (for example, phenyl optionally substituted with, for example, halogen, Ci ⁇ alkyl, or Ci -4 alkoxy or amino); (2) sulfonate esters, such as alkyl- or aralkyl
  • the phosphate esters may be further esterified by, for example, a C- ⁇ -2 o alcohol or reactive derivative thereof, or by a 2,3-di (C 6- 2 4 )acyl glycerol.
  • Compounds of Formula I, and salts, solvates, esters and prodrugs thereof may exist in their tautomeric form (for example, as an amide or imino ether). All such tautomeric forms are contemplated herein as part of the present invention.
  • the compounds of Formula (I) may contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and, therefore, exist in different stereoisomers forms. It is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of Formula (I) as well as mixtures thereof, including racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention.
  • the present invention embraces all geometric and positional isomers. For example, if a compound of Formula (I) incorporates a double bond or a fused ring, both the cis- and trans-forms, as well as mixtures, are embraced within the scope of the invention.
  • Diastereomeric mixtures can be separated into their individual diastereomers on the basis of their physical chemical differences by methods well known to those skilled in the art, such as, for example, by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization.
  • Enantiomers can be separated by converting the enantiomeric mixture into a diastereomeric mixture by reaction with an appropriate optically active compound (e.g., chiral auxiliary such as a chiral alcohol or Mosher's acid chloride), separating the diastereomers and converting (e.g., hydrolyzing) the individual diastereomers to the corresponding pure enantiomers.
  • an appropriate optically active compound e.g., chiral auxiliary such as a chiral alcohol or Mosher's acid chloride
  • some of the compounds of Formula (I) may be atropisomers (e.g., substituted biaryls) and are considered as part of this invention.
  • Enantiomers can also be separated by use of chiral HPLC column
  • All stereoisomers for example, geometric isomers, optical isomers and the like
  • of the present compounds including those of the salts, solvates, esters and prodrugs of the compounds as well as the salts, solvates and esters of the prodrugs
  • those which may exist due to asymmetric carbons on various substituents including enantiomeric forms (which may exist even in the absence of asymmetric carbons), rotameric forms, atropisomers, and diastereomeric forms, are contemplated within the scope of this invention, as are positional isomers (such as, for example, 4-pyridyl and 3-pyridyl).
  • Individual stereoisomers of the compounds of the invention may, for example, be substantially free of other isomers, or may be admixed, for example, as racemates or with all other, or other selected, stereoisomers.
  • the chiral centers of the present invention can have the S or R configuration as defined by the IUPAC 1974 Recommendations.
  • the use of the terms "salt”, “solvate”, “ester”, “prodrug” and the like, is intended to equally apply to the salt, solvate, ester and prodrug of enantiomers, stereoisomers, rotamers, tautomers, positional isomers, racemates or prodrugs of the inventive compounds.
  • the present invention also embraces isotopically-labelled compounds of the present invention which are identical to those recited herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 0, 17 0, 31 P, 32 P, 35 S, 18 F, and 36 CI, respectively.
  • Certain isotopically-labelled compounds of Formula (I) are useful in compound and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated (i.e., 3 H) and carbon-14 (i.e., 14 C) isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability.
  • lsotopically labelled compounds of Formula (I) can generally be prepared by following procedures analogous to those disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples hereinbelow, by substituting an appropriate isotopically labelled reagent for a non- isotopically labelled reagent.
  • amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disorder by administration of a particular compound or pharmaceutical composition refers to any lessening, whether permanent or temporary, lasting or transient that can be attributed to or associated with administration of the composition.
  • IC 50 refers to an amount, concentration or dosage of a particular test compound that achieves a 50% inhibition of a maximal response, such as modulation of CDK-2 kinase activity, in an assay that measures such response.
  • EC 50 refers to a dosage, concentration or amount of a particular test compound that elicits a dose-dependent response at 50% of maximal expression of a particular response that is induced, provoked or potentiated by the particular test compound.
  • amino acid residues such residues may be of either the L- or D-form.
  • the configuration for naturally occurring amino acid residues is generally L.
  • the residue is the L form.
  • amino acid refers to ⁇ -amino acids which are racemic, or of either the D- or L-configuration.
  • the designation "d” preceding an amino acid designation e.g., dAla, dSer, dVal, etc. refers to the D-isomer of the amino acid.
  • dil preceding an amino acid designation (e.g., dlPip) refers to a mixture of the L- and D-isomers of the amino acid.
  • substantially pure means sufficiently homogeneous to appear free of readily detectable impurities as determined by standard methods of analysis, such as thin layer chromatography (TLC), gel electrophoresis, high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and mass spectrometry (MS), used by those of skill in the art to assess such purity, or sufficiently pure such that further purification would not detectably alter the physical and chemical properties, such as enzymatic and biological activities, of the substance.
  • TLC thin layer chromatography
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • MS mass spectrometry
  • purified refers to the physical state of said compound after being isolated from a synthetic process or natural source or combination thereof.
  • purified refers to the physical state of said compound after being obtained from a purification process or processes described herein or well known to the skilled artisan, in sufficient purity to be characterizable by standard analytical techniques described herein or well known to the skilled artisan.
  • haloalkoxy refers to RO- in which R is a haloalkyl group.
  • heterocyclyloxy refers to RO- in which R is a heterocyclyl group
  • heteroaryloxy refers to RO- in which R is a heteroaryl group
  • substituted alkyl refers to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, substituted heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclyl, “substituted alkylene,” “substituted alkenylene,” “substituted alkynylene,” “substituted cycloalkylene,” “substituted cycloalkenylene,” “substituted cycloalkynylene,” “substituted arylene,” “substituted heteroarylene” and “substituted heterocyclylene” refer to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynylene, cycloalkynylene,” “substituted arylene
  • amido refers to the divalent group -C(O)NH-.
  • Thioamido refers to the divalent group -C(S)NH-.
  • Oxyamido refers to the divalent group - OC(O)NH-.
  • Thiaamido refers to the divalent group -SC(O)NH-.
  • Dithiaamido refers to the divalent group -SC(S)NH-.
  • Ureido refers to the divalent group - HNC(O)NH-.
  • Thioureido refers to the divalent group -HNC(S)NH-.
  • haloalkyl may include one or more of the same or different halogens.
  • haloalkyl may include one or more of the same or different halogens.
  • Ci_ 3 alkoxyphenyl may include one or more of the same or different alkoxy groups containing one, two or three carbons.
  • the compounds provided herein for use in the compositions and methods provided herein have formula I, where the variables are as described below. All combinations of such embodiments are within the scope of the instant disclosure.
  • R 2 is hydrogen, -CO 2 R 6 , -N(R 6 )SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)NHSO 2 R 6 , -SO 2 R 6 , -(C(O)N(R 6 ) 2 ), heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl; where R 6 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; and R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkenyl, alkylalkenyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alky
  • the groups R 0 , R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 ,and R 8 are selected such that the resulting compound has an inhibitory effect on CDK-2.
  • the groups R 0 , R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 ,and R 8 are selected such that the resulting compound has an inhibitory effect on CDK-2.
  • R 5 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino;
  • R 2 is hydrogen, -CO 2 R 6 , -N(R 6 )SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)NHSO 2 R 6 , -SO 2 R 6 , -(C(O)N(R 6 ) 2 ), heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl; where R 6 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; and
  • each R 7 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro or halo; and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • R° is N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl
  • R 0 is:
  • R 0 is:
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxyoxo, aminoalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, carboxy, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, oxo, -CO 2 R 5 , -C(O)N(R 5 ) 2 ,
  • R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
  • R 1 is:
  • R 1 is:
  • R 1 is:
  • R 1 is -C(O)OCH 3 .
  • R 1 is -CH2OCH 3 .
  • R 2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, carboxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylsulfonamido, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -CO 2 R 6 , -N(R 6 )SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)NHSO 2 R 6 , -SO 2 R 6 , ⁇ C(O)N(R ⁇ ) 2 , or - C(O)NHC(R 6 )C(O)R 6 ; where R 6 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylhetero
  • R 2 is hydrogen, -CO 2 R 6 , -N(R 6 )SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)NHSO 2 R 6 , - SO 2 R 6 , -C(O)N(R 6 ) 2 , or -C(O)NHC(R 6 )C(O)R 6 ; where R 6 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
  • R 2 is:
  • R is:
  • R 2 is
  • R 2 is
  • R 2 is -COOH. In another embodiment, R 2 is -NHS(O) 2 C(CH 3 ) 3 . In another embodiment, R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, arylcycloalkyl, aryloxyaryl, aminoaryl, aminoalkylaryl, alkyloxa, alkylthia, cyanoalkynyl, cyanoaryl, cycloalkyl, haloaryl, haloarylalkyl, haloarylalkenyl, haloalkylaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, hydroxyalky
  • n is 1 or 2 and Q 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, -NHC(O), - S(O) 2 NH 1 Or -NHS(O) 2 .
  • R 3 is:
  • n is 1 or 2;
  • Q 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, -NHC(O), S(O) 2 NH, or -NHS(O) 2 ; and
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is:
  • A is O or S.
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is:
  • R 3 is:
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl; R 2 is -CO 2 H; and
  • R 3 is haloalkylaryl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl; R 2 is -CO 2 H; and
  • R 3 is arylcycloalkyl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl; R 2 is -CO 2 H; and
  • R 3 is haloalkoxyaryl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl; R 2 is -CO 2 H; and
  • R 3 is alkyl
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl
  • R 2 is -CO 2 H
  • R 3 is haloarylalkyl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl
  • R 2 is -CO 2 H
  • R 3 is haloarylalkenyl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl
  • R 2 is -CO 2 H
  • R 3 is haloarylalkyl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl
  • R 2 is -CO 2 H
  • R 3 is alkenyl
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl
  • R 2 is -CO 2 H
  • R 3 is alkynyl.
  • R 0 is hydroxyaryl
  • R 1 is -CO 2 R 5 , where R 5 is alkyl
  • R 2 is -CO 2 H
  • R 3 is heteroarylalkylaryl.
  • the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein have the formulae shown in Table 1.
  • Table 1 lists representative compounds with their molecular structure (with hydrogen atoms bound to carbon and to secondary nitrogen omitted) and their inhibitory effectiveness toward CDK-2.
  • IC 50 "A” represents an IC 5 O of ⁇ 1 ⁇ M; "B” of > 1 ⁇ M but ⁇ 40 ⁇ M; and "C” of ⁇ 40 ⁇ M).
  • the compounds described herein can be obtained from commercial sources or synthesized by conventional methods as shown below using commercially available starting materials and reagents.
  • the compounds can be made using the chemical scheme provided below:
  • lodostatin 1 can be converted to the dicarboxylic acid 2, using pyruvic acid and KOH.
  • R 3 can be inserted using standard coupling with the corresponding boronic acid derivative. Suitable protection of the caroboxyl on C4 and activation of the C2 carboxyl followed by coupling with 6, yields 7.
  • 6 may be commercially available or can be synthesized using standard synthetic conditions as known to one of ordinary skill in the art, to make the preferred R 0 and R 1 substituents.
  • 7 can be converted to 8, 9, 10, or 11, using the conditions shown above. Each of the above pathways allows the introduction of R 2 as desired.
  • the compounds described herein can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high-pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M.
  • the compounds according to the invention have pharmacological properties; in particular, the compounds of Formula I can be inhibitors of protein kinases such as, for example, the inhibitors of the cyclin-dependent kinases, mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK/ERK), glycogen synthase kinase 3(GSK3beta) and the like.
  • the cyclin dependent kinases (CDKs) include, for example, CDC2 (CDK1), CDK2, CDK4, CDK5, CDK6, CDK7 and CDK8.
  • novel compounds of Formula I are expected to be useful in the therapy of proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease.
  • proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease.
  • proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease.
  • the compounds of Formula I can be useful in the treatment of a variety of cancers, including (but not limited to) the following: carcinoma, including that of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, including small cell lung cancer, esophagus, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid, prostate, and skin, including squamous cell carcinoma; hematopoietic tumors of lymphoid lineage, including leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma, T- cell lymphoma, Hodgkins lymphoma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma and Burkett's lymphoma; hematopoietic tumors of myeloid lineage, including acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, myelodysplastic syndrome and promyelocytic leukemia; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosar
  • inhibitors could act as reversible cytostatic agents which may be useful in the treatment of any disease process which features abnormal cellular proliferation, e.g., benign prostate hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neurofibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, and fungal infections.
  • any disease process e.g., benign prostate hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neurofibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, and fungal infections.
  • Compounds of Formula I can also be useful in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, as suggested by the recent finding that CDK5 is involved in the phosphorylation of tau protein (J. Biochem, (1995) 117, 741-749).
  • Compounds of Formula I may induce or inhibit apoptosis.
  • the apoptotic response is aberrant in a variety of human diseases.
  • Compounds of Formula I, as modulators of apoptosis, will be useful in the treatment of cancer (including but not limited to those types mentioned hereinabove), viral infections (including but not limited to herpevirus, poxvirus, Epstein- Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus), prevention of AIDS development in HIV-infected individuals, autoimmune diseases (including but not limited to systemic lupus, erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, and autoimmune diabetes mellitus), neurodegenerative disorders (including but not limited to Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy and cerebellar degeneration), mye
  • Compounds of Formula I can modulate the level of cellular RNA and DNA synthesis. These agents would therefore be useful in the treatment of viral infections (including but not limited to HIV, human papilloma virus, herpesvirus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus).
  • viral infections including but not limited to HIV, human papilloma virus, herpesvirus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus.
  • Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in the chemoprevention of cancer. Chemoprevention is defined as inhibiting the development of invasive cancer by either blocking the initiating mutagenic event or by blocking the progression of pre-malignant cells that have already suffered an insult or inhibiting tumor relapse. Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in inhibiting tumor angiogenesis and metastasis.
  • Compounds of Formula I may also act as inhibitors of other protein kinases, e.g., protein kinase C, her2, raf 1 , MEK1 , MAP kinase, EGF receptor, PDGF receptor, IGF receptor, PI3 kinase, weel kinase, Src, AbI and thus be effective in the treatment of diseases associated with other protein kinases.
  • protein kinase C her2, raf 1 , MEK1 , MAP kinase, EGF receptor, PDGF receptor, IGF receptor, PI3 kinase, weel kinase, Src, AbI and thus be effective in the treatment of diseases associated with other protein kinases.
  • another aspect of this invention is a method of treating a mammal (e.g., human) having a disease or condition associated with the CDKs by administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound to the mammal.
  • the compounds of this invention may also be useful in combination with one or more of anti-cancer treatments such as radiation therapy, and/or one or more anticancer agents selected from the group consisting of cytostatic agents, cytotoxic agents (such as for example, but not limited to, DNA interactive agents (such as cisplatin or doxorubicin)); taxanes (e.g.
  • topoisomerase Il inhibitors such as etoposide
  • topoisomerase I inhibitors such as irinotecan (or CPT-11), camptostar, or topotecan
  • tubulin interacting agents such as paclitaxel, docetaxel or the epothilones
  • hormonal agents such as tamoxifen
  • thymidilate synthase inhibitors such as 5-fluorouracil
  • anti-metabolites such as methoxtrexate
  • alkylating agents such as temozolomide (TEMODARTM from Schering-Plough Corporation, Kenilworth, New Jersey), cyclophosphamide
  • Farnesyl protein transferase inhibitors such as, SARASARTM(4-[2-[4-[(11 R)-3,10-dibromo-8-chloro- 6,11-dihydro-5H-benzo[5,6]cyclohepta[1 ,2-b]
  • anti-cancer agents include but are not limited to Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Ifosfamide, Melphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylenemelamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, dacarbazine, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, 6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, oxaliplatin, leucovirin, oxaliplatin (ELOXATI NTM from Sanofi-Synthelabo Pharmaeuticals, France), Pentostatine, Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Idarubicin, Mithramycin, Deoxycoformycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Teniposide
  • the therapeutic agents in the combination may be administered in any order such as, for example, sequentially, concurrently, together, simultaneously and the like.
  • the amounts of the various actives in such combination therapy may be different amounts (different dosage amounts) or same amounts (same dosage amounts).
  • a compound of Formula I and an additional therapeutic agent may be present in fixed amounts (dosage amounts) in a single dosage unit (e.g., a capsule, a tablet and the like).
  • a commercial example of such single dosage unit containing fixed amounts of two different active compounds for oral administration is VYTORIN ® (available from Merck Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Kenilworth, New Jersey).
  • such combination products employ the compounds of this invention within the dosage range described herein and the other pharmaceutically active agent or treatment within its dosage range.
  • the CDC2 inhibitor olomucine has been found to act synergistically with known cytotoxic agents in inducing apoptosis (J. Cell ScL, (1995) 108, 2897.
  • Compounds of Formula I may also be administered sequentially with known anticancer or cytotoxic agents when a combination formulation is inappropriate.
  • the invention is not limited in the sequence of administration; compounds of Formula I may be administered either prior to or after administration of the known anticancer or cytotoxic agent.
  • this invention includes combinations comprising an amount of at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, and an amount of one or more anti-cancer treatments and anticancer agents listed above wherein the amounts of the compounds/ treatments result in desired therapeutic effect.
  • compositions which comprise at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • compositions provided herein contain therapeutically effective amounts of one or more of the compounds provided herein that are useful in the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of one or more of the symptoms of diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2, in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2 include, but are not limited to, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, cancer and diabetes.
  • Pharmaceutical carriers suitable for administration of the compounds provided herein include any such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration.
  • the compounds may be formulated as the sole pharmaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be combined with other active ingredients.
  • compositions contain one or more compounds provided herein.
  • the compounds are, in one embodiment, formulated into suitable pharmaceutical preparations such as solutions, suspensions, tablets, dispersible tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained release formulations or elixirs, for oral administration or in sterile solutions or suspensions for parenteral administration, as well as transdermal patch preparation and dry powder inhalers.
  • suitable pharmaceutical preparations such as solutions, suspensions, tablets, dispersible tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained release formulations or elixirs, for oral administration or in sterile solutions or suspensions for parenteral administration, as well as transdermal patch preparation and dry powder inhalers.
  • the compounds described above are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using techniques and procedures well known in the art (see, e.g., Ansel Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Fourth Edition 1985, 126).
  • compositions effective concentrations of one or more compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof is (are) mixed with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the compounds may be derivatized as the corresponding salts, esters, enol ethers or esters, acetals, ketals, orthoesters, hemiacetals, hemiketals, acids, bases, solvates, hydrates or prodrugs prior to formulation, as described above.
  • concentrations of the compounds in the compositions are effective for delivery of an amount, upon administration, that treats, prevents, or ameliorates one or more of the symptoms of diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2 activity or in which CDK-2 activity is implicated.
  • compositions are formulated for single dosage administration.
  • the weight fraction of compound is dissolved, suspended, dispersed or otherwise mixed in a selected carrier at an effective concentration such that the treated condition is relieved, prevented, or one or more symptoms are ameliorated.
  • the active compound is included in the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful effect in the absence of undesirable side effects on the patient treated.
  • the therapeutically effective concentration may be determined empirically by testing the compounds using in vitro and in vivo systems described herein and then extrapolated therefrom for dosages for humans.
  • a therapeutically effective dosage should produce a serum concentration of active ingredient of from about 0.1 ng/ml to about 50- 100 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions in another embodiment, should provide a dosage of from about 0.001 mg to about 2000 mg of compound per kilogram of body weight per day.
  • Pharmaceutical dosage unit forms are prepared to provide from about 0.01 mg, 0.1 mg or 1 mg to about 500mg, 1000 mg or 2000 mg, and in one embodiment from about 10 mg to about 500 mg of the active ingredient or a combination of essential ingredients per dosage unit form.
  • the active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the disease being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed compositions.
  • solubilizing compounds may be used. Such methods are known to those of skill in this art, and include, but are not limited to, using cosolvents, such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), using surfactants, such as TWEEN ® , or dissolution in aqueous sodium bicarbonate. Derivatives of the compounds, such as prodrugs of the compounds may also be used in formulating effective pharmaceutical compositions.
  • cosolvents such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO)
  • surfactants such as TWEEN ®
  • dissolution in aqueous sodium bicarbonate such as sodium bicarbonate
  • the resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsion or the like.
  • the form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle.
  • the effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the disease, disorder or condition treated and may be empirically determined.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are provided for administration to humans and animals in unit dosage forms, such as tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granules, sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions, and oral solutions or suspensions, and oil-water emulsions containing suitable quantities of the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.
  • the pharmaceutically therapeutically active compounds and derivatives thereof are, in one embodiment, formulated and administered in unit-dosage forms or multiple- dosage forms.
  • Unit-dose forms as used herein refers to physically discrete units suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged individually as is known in the art. Each unit-dose contains a predetermined quantity of the therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier, vehicle or diluent. Examples of unit-dose forms include ampoules and syringes and individually packaged tablets or capsules. Unit- dose forms may be administered in fractions or multiples thereof.
  • a multiple-dose form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit-dose form. Examples of multiple-dose forms include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules or bottles of pints or gallons. Hence, multiple dose form is a multiple of unit-doses which are not segregated in packaging.
  • Liquid pharmaceutically administrable compositions can, for example, be prepared by dissolving, dispersing, or otherwise mixing an active compound as defined above and optional pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol, and the like, to thereby form a solution or suspension.
  • a carrier such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol, and the like, to thereby form a solution or suspension.
  • the pharmaceutical composition to be administered may also contain minor amounts of nontoxic auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents.
  • nontoxic auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents.
  • compositions containing active ingredient in the range of 0.005% to 100% with the balance made up from non-toxic carrier may be prepared. Methods for preparation of these compositions are known to those skilled in the art.
  • the contemplated compositions may contain 0.001 %-100% active ingredient, in one embodiment 0.1-95%, in another embodiment 75-85%.
  • Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms are either solid, gel or liquid.
  • the solid dosage forms are tablets, capsules, granules, and bulk powders.
  • Types of oral tablets include compressed, chewable lozenges and tablets which may be enteric- coated, sugar-coated or film-coated.
  • Capsules may be hard or soft gelatin capsules, while granules and powders may be provided in non-effervescent or effervescent form with the combination of other ingredients known to those skilled in the art. a.
  • the formulations are solid dosage forms, in one embodiment, capsules or tablets.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain one or more of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder; a lubricant; a diluent; a glidant; a disintegrating agent; a coloring agent; a sweetening agent; a flavoring agent; a wetting agent; an emetic coating; and a film coating.
  • binders include microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth, glucose solution, acacia mucilage, gelatin solution, molasses, polvinylpyrrolidine, povidone, crospovidones, sucrose and starch paste.
  • Lubricants include talc, starch, magnesium or calcium stearate, lycopodium and stearic acid.
  • Diluents include, for example, lactose, sucrose, starch, kaolin, salt, mannitol and dicalcium phosphate.
  • Glidants include, but are not limited to, colloidal silicon dioxide.
  • Disintegrating agents include crosscarmellose sodium, sodium starch glycolate, alginic acid, corn starch, potato starch, bentonite, methylcellulose, agar and carboxymethylcellulose.
  • Coloring agents include, for example, any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, mixtures thereof; and water insoluble FD and C dyes suspended on alumina hydrate.
  • Sweetening agents include sucrose, lactose, mannitol and artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin, and any number of spray dried flavors.
  • Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such as fruits and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant sensation, such as, but not limited to peppermint and methyl salicylate.
  • Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene laural ether.
  • Emetic-coatings include fatty acids, fats, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac and cellulose acetate phthalates.
  • Film coatings include hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000 and cellulose acetate phthalate.
  • the compound, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof could be provided in a composition that protects it from the acidic environment of the stomach.
  • the composition can be formulated in an enteric coating that maintains its integrity in the stomach and releases the active compound in the intestine.
  • the composition may also be formulated in combination with an antacid or other such ingredient.
  • the dosage unit form is a capsule, it can contain, in addition to material of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil.
  • dosage unit forms can contain various other materials which modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar and other enteric agents.
  • the compounds can also be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, sprinkle, chewing gum or the like.
  • a syrup may contain, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.
  • the active materials can also be mixed with other active materials which do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antacids, H2 blockers, and diuretics.
  • the active ingredient is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof as described herein. Higher concentrations, up to about 98% by weight of the active ingredient may be included.
  • tablets and capsules formulations may be coated as known by those of skill in the art in order to modify or sustain dissolution of the active ingredient. Thus, for example, they may be coated with a conventional enterically digestible coating, such as phenylsalicylate, waxes and cellulose acetate phthalate. b.
  • Liquid compositions for oral administration include aqueous solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutions and/or suspensions reconstituted from non-effervescent granules and effervescent preparations reconstituted from effervescent granules.
  • Aqueous solutions include, for example, elixirs and syrups. Emulsions are either oil-in-water or water-in-oil. Elixirs are clear, sweetened, hydroalcoholic preparations.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in elixirs include solvents. Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may contain a preservative.
  • An emulsion is a two-phase system in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in emulsions are non-aqueous liquids, emulsifying agents and preservatives. Suspensions use pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agents and preservatives.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in non-effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form include diluents, sweeteners and wetting agents.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form include organic acids and a source of carbon dioxide. Coloring and flavoring agents are used in all of the above dosage forms.
  • Solvents include glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol and syrup.
  • preservatives include glycerin, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic acid, sodium benzoate and alcohol.
  • non-aqueous liquids utilized in emulsions include mineral oil and cottonseed oil.
  • emulsifying agents include gelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
  • Suspending agents include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum and acacia.
  • Sweetening agents include sucrose, syrups, glycerin and artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin.
  • Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene lauryi ether.
  • Organic acids include citric and tartaric acid.
  • Sources of carbon dioxide include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate.
  • Coloring agents include any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, and mixtures thereof.
  • Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such fruits, and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant taste sensation.
  • the solution or suspension in for example propylene carbonate, vegetable oils or triglycerides, is in one embodiment encapsulated in a gelatin capsule.
  • the solution e.g., for example, in a polyethylene glycol
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier e.g., water
  • liquid or semi-solid oral formulations may be prepared by dissolving or dispersing the active compound or salt in vegetable oils, glycols, triglycerides, propylene glycol esters (e.g., propylene carbonate) and other such carriers, and encapsulating these solutions or suspensions in hard or soft gelatin capsule shells.
  • such formulations include, but are not limited to, those containing a compound provided herein, a dialkylated mono- or poly-alkylene glycol, including, but not limited to, 1 ,2-dimethoxymethane, diglyme, triglyme, tetraglyme, polyethylene glycol-350-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-550-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-750-dimethyl ether wherein 350, 550 and 750 refer to the approximate average molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol, and one or more antioxidants, such as butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), propyl gallate, vitamin E, hydroquinone, hydroxycoumarins, ethanolamine, lecithin, cephalin, ascorbic acid, malic acid, sorbitol, phosphoric acid, thiodipropionic acid and its esters, and dithiocarbamates.
  • BHT buty
  • formulations include, but are not limited to, aqueous alcoholic solutions including a pharmaceutically acceptable acetal.
  • Alcohols used in these formulations are any pharmaceutically acceptable water-miscible solvents having one or more hydroxyl groups, including, but not limited to, propylene glycol and ethanol.
  • Acetals include, but are not limited to, di(lower alkyl) acetals of lower alkyl aldehydes such as acetaldehyde diethyl acetal. 2. Injectables, solutions and emulsions
  • injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions.
  • the injectables, solutions and emulsions also contain one or more excipients. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, glycerol or ethanol.
  • compositions to be administered may also contain minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate and cyclodextrins.
  • auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate and cyclodextrins.
  • a compound provided herein is dispersed in a solid inner matrix, e.g., polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene- vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hydrophilic polymers such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, cross-linked polyvinylalcohol and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, that is surrounded by an outer polymeric membrane, e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl
  • Parenteral administration of the compositions includes intravenous, subcutaneous and intramuscular administrations.
  • Preparations for parenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products, such as lyophilized powders, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions.
  • the solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous.
  • suitable carriers include physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • PBS physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline
  • thickening and solubilizing agents such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in parenteral preparations include aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable substances.
  • aqueous vehicles examples include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers
  • Nonaqueous parenteral vehicles include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil.
  • Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations must be added to parenteral preparations packaged in multiple-dose containers which include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride.
  • Isotonic agents include sodium chloride and dextrose. Buffers include phosphate and citrate.
  • Antioxidants include sodium bisulfate.
  • Local anesthetics include procaine hydrochloride.
  • Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcelluose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • Emulsifying agents include Polysorbate 80 (TWEEN ® 80).
  • a sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions include EDTA.
  • Pharmaceutical carriers also include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles; and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.
  • the concentration of the pharmaceutically active compound is adjusted so that an injection provides an effective amount to produce the desired pharmacological effect.
  • the exact dose depends on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art.
  • the unit-dose parenteral preparations are packaged in an ampoule, a vial or a syringe with a needle. All preparations for parenteral administration must be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art.
  • intravenous or intraarterial infusion of a sterile aqueous solution containing an active compound is an effective mode of administration.
  • Another embodiment is a sterile aqueous or oily solution or suspension containing an active material injected as necessary to produce the desired pharmacological effect.
  • a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain a concentration of at least about 0.1 % w/w up to about 90% w/w or more, in certain embodiments more than 1% w/w of the active compound to the treated tissue(s).
  • the compound may be suspended in micronized or other suitable form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble active product or to produce a prodrug.
  • the form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle.
  • the effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the condition and may be empirically determined. 3. Lyophilized powders
  • lyophilized powders which can be reconstituted for administration as solutions, emulsions and other mixtures. They may also be reconstituted and formulated as solids or gels.
  • the sterile, lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, in a suitable solvent.
  • the solvent may contain an excipient which improves the stability or other pharmacological component of the powder or reconstituted solution, prepared from the powder. Excipients that may be used include, but are not limited to, dextrose, sorbital, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose or other suitable agent.
  • the solvent may also contain a buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium phosphate or other such buffer known to those of skill in the art at, in one embodiment, about neutral pH.
  • the resulting solution will be apportioned into vials for lyophilization.
  • Each vial will contain a single dosage or multiple dosages of the compound.
  • the lyophilized powder can be stored under appropriate conditions, such as at about 4 0 C to room temperature.
  • Reconstitution of this lyophilized powder with water for injection provides a formulation for use in parenteral administration.
  • the lyophilized powder is added to sterile water or other suitable carrier. The precise amount depends upon the selected compound. Such amount can be empirically determined. 4. Topical administration
  • Topical mixtures are prepared as described for the local and systemic administration.
  • the resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsions or the like and are formulated as creams, gels, ointments, emulsions, solutions, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, dermal patches or any other formulations suitable for topical administration.
  • the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof may be formulated as aerosols for topical application, such as by inhalation.
  • formulations for administration to the respiratory tract can be in the form of an aerosol or solution for a nebulizer, or as a microfine powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inert carrier such as lactose.
  • the particles of the formulation will, in one embodiment, have diameters of less than 50 microns, in one embodiment less than 10 microns.
  • the compounds may be formulated for local or topical application, such as for topical application to the skin and mucous membranes, such as in the eye, in the form of gels, creams, and lotions and for application to the eye or for intracisternal or intraspinal application.
  • Topical administration is contemplated for transdermal delivery and also for administration to the eyes or mucosa, or for inhalation therapies. Nasal solutions of the active compound alone or in combination with other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients can also be administered.
  • compositions for other routes of administration may be formulated as 0.01% - 10% isotonic solutions, pH about 5-7, with appropriate salts. 5.
  • routes of administration such as transdermal patches, including iontophoretic and electrophoretic devices, and rectal administration, are also contemplated herein.
  • Transdermal patches, including iotophoretic and electrophoretic devices are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • pharmaceutical dosage forms for rectal administration are rectal suppositories, capsules and tablets for systemic effect. Rectal suppositories are used herein mean solid bodies for insertion into the rectum which melt or soften at body temperature releasing one or more pharmacologically or therapeutically active ingredients.
  • compositions utilized in rectal suppositories are bases or vehicles and agents to raise the melting point.
  • bases include cocoa butter (theobroma oil), glycerin-gelatin, carbowax (polyoxyethylene glycol) and appropriate mixtures of mono-, di- and triglycerides of fatty acids. Combinations of the various bases may be used.
  • Agents to raise the melting point of suppositories include spermaceti and wax.
  • Rectal suppositories may be prepared either by the compressed method or by molding.
  • the weight of a rectal suppository in one embodiment, is about 2 to 3 gm.
  • Tablets and capsules for rectal administration are manufactured using the same pharmaceutically acceptable substance and by the same methods as for formulations for oral administration. 6. Targeted Formulations
  • the compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, may also be formulated to be targeted to a particular tissue, receptor, or other area of the body of the subject to be treated. Many such targeting methods are well known to those of skill in the art. All such targeting methods are contemplated herein for use in the instant compositions.
  • liposomal suspensions including tissue-targeted liposomes, such as tumor-targeted liposomes, may also be suitable as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • liposomes such as multilamellar vesicles (MLV's) may be formed by drying down egg phosphatidyl choline and brain phosphatidyl serine (7:3 molar ratio) on the inside of a flask. A solution of a compound provided herein in phosphate buffered saline lacking divalent cations (PBS) is added and the flask shaken until the lipid film is dispersed. The resulting vesicles are washed to remove unencapsulated compound, pelleted by centrifugation, and then resuspended in PBS. 7.
  • PBS phosphate buffered saline lacking divalent cations
  • the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives may be packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof provided herein, which is effective for modulating the activity of CDK-2, or for treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms of CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders, or diseases or disorders in which CDK-2 activity, is implicated, within the packaging material, and a label that indicates that the compound or composition, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, is used for modulating the activity of CDK-2, or for treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms of CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders, or diseases or disorders in which CDK-2 is implicated.
  • packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment.
  • a wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions provided herein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any disease or disorder in which CDK-2 is implicated as a mediator or contributor to the symptoms or cause.
  • Fluorescence polarization assay The affinity of lead inhibitors binding to CDK-2 and CDK-2/cyclin A were determined by measuring a Ki value using a fluorescence polarization displacement assay.
  • the deacetylated form of compound BMS-250595 was reacted with Alexa Fluor 647 to generate a compound (BMS-Alexa Fluor647) that bound to both proteins and provided a signal for fluorescence polarization displacement.
  • Binding assays were performed in a 384 well Costar NBS coated plate. A total volume of 80 ml contained concentrations of CDK-2 or CDK-2/cyclin A at 2.2 mM and 0.22 mM, respectively. The concentration of BMS-Alexa Fluor647 was 50 nM.
  • ITC Isothermal titration calorimetry
  • the MicroCal MCS ITC (Northampton, MA) and included software were used for performing the titrations and analysis.
  • the ITC runs were performed at 20 0 C and mixed at a rate of 350 rpm. Injection volumes varied from 15 - 18 ml and 360 sec was recorded for each titration. When a clear baseline was not observed a blank titration was performed to subtract it from the raw data.
  • TdCD Temperature-dependent Circular Dichroism
  • a 6 cell peltier temperature controlled Jasco 810 spectropolarimeter was used to measure temperature-dependent protein unfolding profiles.
  • a 0.1 cm path length cell was used and the protein concentrations were 0.2 mg/ml (6 mM).
  • the buffer was 10 mM Hepes, 150 mM NaCI, 10 % glycerol, 1 mM DTT, pH 7.5.
  • the wavelength was adjusted to 230 nm.
  • a temperature rate of 1 °C/min was used and an integration of 4 sec per sample at each temperature was recorded (every 0.5 °C).
  • a band width of 4 nm was used to improve the signal to noise.
  • NMR spectra were acquired on a Mercury p ⁇ us 400 MHz NMR Spectrometer (Varian).
  • LC-MS data was obtained using an Agilent 1100 Series LC/MSD (quadrupole, API-ES (Atmospheric Pressure Interface Electrospray)) with a capillary voltage set to 3500 V and running in positive mode.
  • Part A A solution of 3-(4-Benzyloxy-phenyl)-2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 , 3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)- propionamide (1) (200 mg, 0.5 mmol) in N, N'-dimethylformamide acetal was heated at reflux for 1.5 h. After evaporating of the solvent, the residue was dissolved in acetic acid (5 ml_) and hydrazine hydrate (15 ⁇ l_) was added. The reaction was stirred at 90 0 C for 1.5 h and left standing at room temperature overnight. After removal of acetic acid, the residue was purified using prep-HPLC to give 100 mg product. LCMS m/z 452.2 (M+1). Part B:
  • Boc-Tyr (Bzl)-aldehyde (1) 200 mg, 0.563 mmol
  • methoxylamine HCI 47 mg, 0.563 mmol
  • anhydrous sodium acetate 230 mg, 2.81 mmol
  • the reaction mixture was concentrated to give a white solid. Further purification by column chromatography (SiO 2 , 5% ethyl acetate/dichloromethane) afforded 2 as a white solid (110 mg, 51 %).
  • Part B To an ice-cold solution of LAH (1.63 mL, 1 M sol in THF, 1.63 mmol) was added dropwise a solution of compound 2 (200 mg, 0.74 mmol) in THF and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched by slowly adding water (3 mL) and then 15% NaOH solution (2mL), when a paste-like solid formed. The solids were filtered off and the layers were separated. The ethereal layer was acidified with 1 N HCI, the layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was made basic with 1 N NaOH solution and ice.
  • the ester 2 (10 mmol) was dissolved in THF (20 ml_) and was added slowly to a mixture of LiBH 4 (653 mg, 30 mmol) and MeOH (1.215 mL, 30 mmol) at 0 0 C (over 10 min). The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0 C for 20 min, then acetic acid (2 mL) was added to quench the reaction. The mixture was diluted by EtOAc (300 mL) and washed with H 2 O, brine, and dried over Na 2 SO 4 . After concentration, crude product 3 was obtained pure enough for the next step.
  • Part B A solution containing 2 (30 mg, 0.04 mmol), pyrazole (8.2 mg, 0.12 mmol) and Cs 2 CO 3 (50 mg, 0.15 mmol) in DMF was stirred at RT overnight. Ethyl acetate was then added, followed by water. The ethyl acetate layer was collected, washed with water (2 x 10 ml_) and dried over sodium sulfate. After evaporation of solvent, the residue was used directly in the next step.
  • Part B Compound 3 was prepared in 50% yield following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 25, Parts A and B. LCMS m/z 583.3 (M+1).

Abstract

Quinoline-based inhibitors of cyclin dependent kinase 2, compositions including the inhibitors, and methods of using the inhibitors and inhibitor compositions are described. The inhibitors and compositions including them are useful for treating disease or disease symptoms. The invention also provides for methods of making CDK-2 inhibitor compounds, methods of inhibiting CDK-2, and methods for treating disease or disease symptoms.

Description

NOVEL HIGH AFFINITY QUINOLI N E-BASED KINASE LIGANDS
Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to novel quinoline compounds useful as protein kinase inhibitors (such as for example, the inhibitors of the cyclin-dependent kinases, mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK/ERK), glycogen synthase kinase 3(GSK3beta) and the like), pharmaceutical compositions containing the compounds, and methods of treatment using the compounds and compositions to treat diseases such as, for example, cancer, inflammation, arthritis, viral diseases, neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease, cardiovascular diseases, and fungal diseases. The compounds disclosed herein are especially useful as cyclin dependent kinase inhibitors, such as, for example, CDK-1 and CDK-2 inhibitors.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Cell growth and differentiation is a highly controlled process which, when lost, can lead to aberrant cell function, often resulting in a disease state. Protein phosphorylation is one of the main post translational mechanisms used to control cellular function. Protein kinases catalyze the phosphorylation of serine, threonine and tyrosine residues using either ATP or GTP. An analysis of the human genome has revealed that there are predicted to be ~ 500 protein kinases (Manning G., Whyte D.B., Martinez R., Hunter T, Sudarsanam S., Science 298, 1912, 2002; Kostich M, English J, Madison V, Gheyas F, Wang L, Qiu P, Greene J, Laz TM., Genome Biol. 3(9), 2002). When phosphorylation regulation by these kinases is lost, a number of diseases may occur, including diabetes, Alzheimer's, inflammation, and cancer (Cohen P., Eur. J. Biochem. 268, 5001-5010, 2001 ; Cohen P., Nat. Rev. Drug Discovery 1 , 309-315, 2002.)
Multiple cellular signals can stimulate growth, differentiation, and apoptosis, and a key mechanism for regulating these processes involves the cell cycle, which controls cell division by regulating passage through the G1 , S, G2, and M phases of DNA synthesis and mitosis. Progression through the eukaryotic cell cycle is controlled by the cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) family of kinases. CDKs are primarily serine/threonine kinases and they bind to several different regulatory subunits called cyclins. Different CDK/cyclin heterodimers regulate a variety of processes in the cell cycle, thus, it is believed that CDK4/cyclin D and CDK2/cyclin E regulate control through G1 into the onset of the S phase. The down regulation of cyclin D and cyclin E and the up regulation of cyclin A to form heterodimers with CDK2 and CDK1 promotes passage through the S-phase into G2. Finally, activated complexes of CDK1 (Cdc2)/cyclin B and possibly CDK1 (Cdc2)/cyclin A are thought to promote the transition from G2 into the M-phase. (reviewed by Murray A., Cell 116, 221-234, 2004). Some of the known substrates for the CDKs are the tumor suppressor retinoblastoma protein (RB) and related family members p107 and p130 (Grana X., Garriga J., and Mayol X., Oncogene 17, 3365-3383, 1998). Phosphorylation of RB by CDK4 or CDK2 induces the release of E2F transcription factors which in turn promote the expression of regulatory proteins to stimulate cell cycle progression and cell growth. In human tumors, the control of the RB function has been observed to be disrupted through mutation of the RB gene, CDK4 amplification, cyclin D and cyclin E over expression, inactivation of the CDK4 specific protein inhibitor p16INK4A and a disruption in the level of the CDK inhibitor p27KIP1 ( Sherr, C, Roberts J., Genes Dev. 13, 1501-1512, 1999; Hall M., Peters G., Adv. Cancer Res. 68, 67-108, 1996; Stewart T., Wesfall M., Pietenpol J., Trends
Pharmacol. Sci. 24, 139-145, 2003). These functional disruptions are believed to contribute to the development of breast, colon, gastric, prostate, nonsmall cell lung, ovarian and other human cancers (Tsihlias J., Kapusta L., Slingerland J., Annu. Rev. Med. 50, 401-423, 1999; Lloyd R., Erickson L., Jin L., Kulig E., Qian X., Cheville J., Scheithauser B., Am. J. Pathol. 154(4), 313-323, 1999).
The fact that uncontrolled regulation of the cell cycle pathway is thought to be a source of human cancers leads one to believe that inhibition of unregulated CDK activity by small molecule inhibitors would be beneficial in the treatment of cancers. A large number of chemical synthesis efforts have been directed toward developing CDK specific ATP competitive inhibitors but only a few molecules have progressed into human clinical trials. These include flavopiridol, roscovitine (CYC-202) and the 2-aminothiazole derivative BMS-387032 (Zhai, S., Senderowicz A., Sausville E., Figg W., Ann. Pharmacother. 36, 905-911 , 2002; McClue S., Blake D., Clarke R., Cummings L., Fischer P., MacKenzie M., Stewart K., Wang S., Zhelev N., Zheleva D., Lane D., Int. J. Cancer 102(5), 463-468, 2002; Misra R., et al., J.Med. Chem. 47, 1719-1728, 2004) There is a need to develop CDK inhibitors for the treatment of human diseases, therefore, it is an objective of this invention to describe compounds that would be useful for the prevention or alteration of these diseases.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to novel compounds and compositions including those compounds as well as methods of using the compounds. The compounds are heterocyclic molecules that are useful in therapeutic applications, including modulation of disease or disease symptoms in a subject (for example, cat, dog, horse, or human). These diseases include Alzheimer's disease, cancer, diabetes, and inflammation. The compounds (including stereoisomers thereof) are synthesized either singly or in a combinatorial fashion to give structurally and stereochemical^/ diverse libraries of compounds.
CDK-2 inhibition by the compounds included in this invention was demonstrated and quantified by measuring the binding affinity (Ki) between these compounds and CDK-2 using a fluorescence polarization displacement assay. In certain embodiments, the compounds are Quinoline compounds that are substituted with aryl amido moieties. In one embodiment, provided herein are compounds of formula (I):
Figure imgf000004_0001
Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof, wherein: R0 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl or heterocyclylalkyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from
Q0;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxyoxo, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, alkylheterocyclyl, carboxy, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, oxo, -CO2R5, -C(O)N(R5)2) or -C=(NOR5), where each of said R5 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; further wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from Q1;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, carboxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylsulfonamido, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -C(O)N(R6)2, or -C(O)NHC(R6)C(O)R6; where each of said R6 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; further wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from
Q2;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, arylcycloalkyl, aryloxyaryl, aminoaryl, aminoalkylaryl, alkyloxa, alkylthia, cyanoalkynyl, cyanoaryl, cycloalkyl, haloaryl, haloalkylaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclyialkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, hydroxyalkyl, thiaalkyl, heteroaryl, nitroaryl, oxaalkyl, oxaalkynyl-CO2R7, -N(R7)SO2R7, -C(O)NHSO2R7, - SO2R7, -C(O)N(R7)2; where each of said R7 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; further wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from
Q3; Q0 is alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryi, aryloxy, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy, -C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2; Q1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryi, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy~C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, or - NHS(O)2;
Q2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkyloxo, alkylsulfonyl, aryl, arylsulfonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, haloaryl, hydroxysulfonyl, alkylaryi, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, aikyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy, - C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2; and
Q3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylamido, alkyloxo, alkylsulfonyl, alkoxyoxo, alkylaryi, alkylheteroaryl, amino, aryloxy, aryl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, halo, alkoxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cyano, dialkylamino, dialkylaminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, haloaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxysulfonyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, hydroxyheterocyclyl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, oxo, nitro, -C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2. Pharmaceutical compositions formulated for administration by an appropriate route and means containing effective concentrations of one or more of the compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, that deliver amounts effective for the treatment, prevention, or amelioration of one or more symptoms of diseases or disorders that are modulated or otherwise affected by CDK-2, are also provided. The effective amounts and concentrations are effective for ameliorating any of the symptoms of any of the diseases or disorders. Methods of treatment, prevention, or amelioration of one or more symptoms of a disease or disorder that is modulated or otherwise affected by CDK-2 is implicated, are provided. Such methods include methods of treatment, prevention and amelioration of one or more symptoms of inflammatory disease, neurodegenerative disease, cancer and diabetes using one or more of the compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof. Non-limiting xamples of inflammatory disease are acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, and adult respiratory distress syndrome. Non-limiting examples of neurodegenerative disease are acute Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, cerebral ischemia, and other neurodegenerative diseases. Non-limiting examples of the diabetes are diabetes mellitus and diabetes insipidus, e.g., type 1 diabetes and type 2 diabetes.
In practicing the methods, effective amounts of the compounds or compositions containing therapeutically effective concentrations of the compounds, which are formulated for systemic delivery, including parenteral, oral, or intravenous delivery, or for local or topical application, for the treatment of CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders, including, but not limited to, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, cancer, diabetes, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, adult respiratory distress syndrome, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, cerebral ischemia, diabetes mellitus, diabetes insipidus, type 1 diabetes, type 2 diabetes, breast cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the ovaries, cancer of the colon, lung cancer, brain cancer, cancer of the larynx, cancer of the lymphatic system, cancer of the genito-urinary tract including the bladder and the prostate, bone cancer and cancer of the pancreas, are administered to an individual exhibiting the symptoms of these diseases or disorders. The amounts are effective to ameliorate or eliminate one or more symptoms of the diseases or disorders. Articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a compound or composition, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, provided herein, which is effective for modulating the activity of CDK-2, mediated diseases or disorders are provided, within the packaging material, and a label that indicates that the compound or composition, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, is used for modulating the activity of CDK-2, mediated diseases or disorders, are provided.
The compounds according to the invention have pharmacological properties; in particular, the compounds of Formula I can be inhibitors of protein kinases such as, for example, the inhibitors of the cyclin-dependent kinases, mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK/ERK), glycogen synthase kinase 3(GSK3beta) and the like. The cyclin dependent kinases (CDKs) include, for example, CDC2 (CDK1 ), CDK2, CDK4, CDK5, CDK6, CDK7 and CDK8. The novel compounds of Formula I are expected to be useful in the therapy of proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease. Many of these diseases and disorders are listed in U.S. 6,413,974 cited earlier, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein. More specifically, the compounds of Formula I can be useful in the treatment of a variety of cancers, including (but not limited to) the following: carcinoma, including that of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, including small cell lung cancer, esophagus, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid, prostate, and skin, including squamous cell carcinoma; hematopoietic tumors of lymphoid lineage, including leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma, T- cell lymphoma, Hodgkins lymphoma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma and Burkett's lymphoma; hematopoietic tumors of myeloid lineage, including acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, myelodysplastic syndrome and promyelocytic leukemia; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosarcoma and rhabdomyosarcoma; tumors of the central and peripheral nervous system, including astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma and schwannomas; and other tumors, including melanoma, seminoma, teratocarcinoma, osteosarcoma, xenoderoma pigmentosum, keratoctanthoma, thyroid follicular cancer and Kaposi's sarcoma.
Due to the key role of CDKs in the regulation of cellular proliferation in general, inhibitors could act as reversible cytostatic agents which may be useful in the treatment of any disease process which features abnormal cellular proliferation, e.g., benign prostate hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neuro- fibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, and fungal infections.
Compounds of Formula I can also be useful in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, as suggested by the recent finding that CDK5 is involved in the phosphorylation of tau protein (J. Biochem, (1995) 117, 741-749).
Compounds of Formula I may induce or inhibit apoptosis. The apoptotic response is aberrant in a variety of human diseases. Compounds of Formula I, as modulators of apoptosis, will be useful in the treatment of cancer (including but not limited to those types mentioned hereinabove), viral infections (including but not limited to herpevirus, poxvirus, Epstein- Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus), prevention of AIDS development in HIV-infected individuals, autoimmune diseases (including but not limited to systemic lupus, erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, and autoimmune diabetes mellitus), neurodegenerative disorders (including but not limited to Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy and cerebellar degeneration), myelodysplastic syndromes, aplastic anemia, ischemic injury associated with myocardial infarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia, atherosclerosis, toxin-induced or alcohol related liver diseases, hematological diseases (including but not limited to chronic anemia and aplastic anemia), degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system (including but not limited to osteoporosis and arthritis) aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain.
Compounds of Formula I, as inhibitors of the CDKs, can modulate the level of cellular RNA and DNA synthesis. These agents would therefore be useful in the treatment of viral infections (including but not limited to HIV, human papilloma virus, herpesvirus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus).
Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in the chemoprevention of cancer. Chemoprevention is defined as inhibiting the development of invasive cancer by either blocking the initiating mutagenic event or by blocking the progression of pre-malignant cells that have already suffered an insult or inhibiting tumor relapse.
Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in inhibiting tumor angiogenesis and metastasis.
Compounds of Formula I may also act as inhibitors of other protein kinases, e.g., protein kinase C, her2, raf 1 , MEK1 , MAP kinase, EGF receptor, PDGF receptor, IGF receptor, PI3 kinase, weel kinase, Src, AbI and thus be effective in the treatment of diseases associated with other protein kinases.
Thus, another aspect of this invention is a method of treating a mammal (e.g., human) having a disease or condition associated with the CDKs by administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound to the mammal.
The pharmacological properties of the compounds of this invention may be confirmed by a number of pharmacological assays. The exemplified pharmacological assays which are described later have been carried out with the compounds according to the invention and their salts. This invention is also directed to pharmaceutical compositions which comprise at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION A. Definitions Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. All patents, applications, published applications and other publications are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In the event that there are a plurality of definitions for a term herein, those in this section prevail unless stated otherwise. As used above, and throughout this disclosure, the following terms, unless otherwise indicated, shall be understood to have the following meanings: "Patient" includes both human and animals. "Mammal" means humans and other mammalian animals. "Alkyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may be straight or branched and comprising about 1 to about 20 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkyl groups contain about 1 to about 12 carbon atoms in the chain. More preferred alkyl groups contain about 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, are attached to a linear alkyl chain. "Lower alkyl" means a group having about 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain which may be straight or branched. "Alkyl" may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted by one or more substituents which may be the same or different, each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, -NH(alkyl), - NH(cycloalkyl), -N(alkyl)2, -O-C(O)-alkyl, -O-C(O)-aryl, -O-C(O)-cycloalkyl, carboxy and -C(O)O-alkyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl and t-butyl.
"Alkenyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond and which may be straight or branched and comprising about 2 to about 15 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkenyl groups have about 2 to about 12 carbon atoms in the chain; and more preferably about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, are attached to a linear alkenyl chain. "Lower alkenyl" means about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain which may be straight or branched. "Alkenyl" may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted by one or more substituents which may be the same or different, each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl. aryl, cycloalkyl, cyano, alkoxy and -S(alkyl). Non-limiting examples of suitable alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, 3-methylbut-2-enyl, n-pentenyl, octenyl and decenyl.
"Alkylene" means a difunctional group obtained by removal of a hydrogen atom from an alkyl group that is defined above. Non-limiting examples of alkylene include methylene, ethylene and propylene.
"Alkenylene" means a difunctional group obtained by removal of a hydrogen from an alkenyl group that is defined above. Non-limiting examples of alkenylene include -CH=CH-, -C(CH3J=CH-, and -CH=CHCH2-.
"Alkynyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and which may be straight or branched and comprising about 2 to about 15 carbon atoms in the chain. Preferred alkynyl groups have about 2 to about 12 carbon atoms in the chain; and more preferably about 2 to about 4 carbon atoms in the chain. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, are attached to a linear alkynyl chain. "Lower alkynyl" means about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms in the chain which may be straight or branched. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, 2-butynyl and 3-methylbutynyl. "Alkynyl" may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted by one or more substituents which may be the same or different, each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl.
"Aryl" means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, preferably about 6 to about 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group can be optionally substituted with one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined herein. Non-limiting examples of suitable aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
"Heteroaryl" means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the ring atoms is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. Preferred heteroaryls contain about 5 to about 6 ring atoms. The "heteroaryl" can be optionally substituted by one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined herein. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heteroaryl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively, is present as a ring atom. A nitrogen atom of a heteroaryl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide. "Heteroaryl" may also include a heteroaryl as defined above fused to an aryl as defined above. Non-limiting examples of suitable heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridone (including N- substituted pyridones), isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, furazanyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-thiadiazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, oxindolyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyridinyl, imidazo[2,1-b]thiazolyl, benzofurazanyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothienyl, quinolinyl, imidazolyl, thienopyridyl, quinazolinyl, thienopyrimidyl, pyrrolopyridyl, imidazopyridyl, isoquinolinyl, benzoazaindolyl, 1 ,2,4-triazinyl, benzothiazolyl and the like. The term "heteroaryl" also refers to partially saturated heteroaryl moieties such as, for example, tetrahydroisoquinolyl, tetrahydroquinolyl and the like.
"Aralkyl" or "arylalkyl" means an aryl-alkyl- group in which the aryl and alkyl are as previously described. Preferred aralkyls comprise a lower alkyl group. Non- limiting examples of suitable aralkyl groups include benzyl, 2-phenethyl and naphthalenylmethyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl.
"Alkylaryl" means an alkyl-aryl- group in which the alkyl and aryl are as previously described. Preferred alkylaryls comprise a lower alkyl group. Non-limiting example of a suitable alkylaryl group is tolyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the aryl.
"Cycloalkyl" means a non-aromatic mono- or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 carbon atoms. Preferred cycloalkyl rings contain about 5 to about 7 ring atoms. The cycloalkyl can be optionally substituted with one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined above. Non-limiting examples of suitable monocyclic cycloalkyls include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and the like. Non-limiting examples of suitable multicyclic cycloalkyls include 1-decalinyl, norbomyl, adamantyl and the like. "Cycloalkylalkyl" means a cycloalkyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core. Non-limiting examples of suitable cycloalkylalkyls include cyclohexylmethyl, adamantylmethyl and the like. "Cycloalkenyl" means a non-aromatic mono or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 carbon atoms which contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Preferred cycloalkenyl rings contain about 5 to about 7 ring atoms. The cycloalkenyl can be optionally substituted with one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined above. Non-limiting examples of suitable monocyclic cycloalkenyls include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohepta-1 ,3-dienyl, and the like. Non-limiting example of a suitable multicyclic cycloalkenyl is norbomylenyl. "Cycloalkenylalkyl" means a cycloalkenyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core. Non-limiting examples of suitable cycloalkenylalkyls include cyclopentenylmethyl, cyclohexenylmethyl and the like.
"Halogen" means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. Preferred are fluorine, chlorine and bromine. "Ring system substituent" means a substituent attached to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring system which, for example, replaces an available hydrogen on the ring system. Ring system substituents may be the same or different, each being independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaralkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, acyl, aroyl, halo, nitro, cyano, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, aralkylthio, heteroaralkylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, -O-C(O)-alkyl, -O-C(O)-aryl, - O-C(O)-cycloalkyl, -C(=N-CN)-NH2, -C(=NH)-NH2, -C(=NH)-NH(alkyl), Y1Y2N-, YiY2N-alkyl-, YiY2NC(O)-, Y1Y2NSO2- and -SO2NY1Y2, wherein Y1 and Y2 can be the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and aralkyl. "Ring system substituent" may also mean a single moiety which simultaneously replaces two available hydrogens on two adjacent carbon atoms (one H on each carbon) on a ring system. Examples of such moiety are methylene dioxy, ethylenedioxy, -C(CHs)2- and the like which form moieties such as, for example:
Figure imgf000015_0001
"Heteroarylalkyl" means a heteroaryl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core. Non-limiting examples of suitable heteroaryls include 2-pyridinylmethyl, quinolinylmethyl and the like. "Heterocyclyl" means a non-aromatic saturated monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. There are no adjacent oxygen and/or sulfur atoms present in the ring system. Preferred heterocyclyls contain about 5 to about 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heterocyclyl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively is present as a ring atom. Any -NH in a heterocyclyl ring may exist protected such as, for example, as an -N(Boc), -N(CBz), -N(Tos) group and the like; such protections are also considered part of this invention. The heterocyclyl can be optionally substituted by one or more "ring system substituents" which may be the same or different, and are as defined herein. The nitrogen or sulfur atom of the heterocyclyl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide, S-oxide or S1S- dioxide. Non-limiting examples of suitable monocyclic heterocyclyl rings include piperidyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, 1 ,4- dioxanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, lactam, lactone, and the like.
"Heterocyclyl" may also mean a single moiety (e.g., carbonyl) which simultaneously replaces two available hydrogens on the same carbon atom on a ring system. Example of such moiety is pyrrolidone:
Figure imgf000015_0002
. "Heterocyclylalkyl" means a heterocyclyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core. Non-limiting examples of suitable heterocyclylalkyls include piperidinylmethyl, piperazinylmethyl and the like.
"Heterocyclenyl" means a non-aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 3 to about 10 ring atoms, preferably about 5 to about 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, alone or in combination, and which contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond or carbon-nitrogen double bond. There are no adjacent oxygen and/or sulfur atoms present in the ring system. Preferred heterocyclenyl rings contain about 5 to about 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heterocyclenyl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively is present as a ring atom. The heterocyclenyl can be optionally substituted by one or more ring system substituents, wherein "ring system substituent" is as defined above. The nitrogen or sulfur atom of the heterocyclenyl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide, S-oxide or S,S-dioxide. Non-limiting examples of suitable heterocyclenyl groups include 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydropyridinyl, 1 ,2-dihydropyridinyl, 1 ,4-dihydropyridinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 1 ,4,5,6-tetrahydropyrimidinyl, 2-pyrroIinyl, 3-pyrrolinyl, 2- imidazolinyl, 2-pyrazoiinyl, dihydroimidazolyl, dihydrooxazolyl, dihydrooxadiazolyl, dihydrothiazolyl, 3,4-dihydro-2H~pyranyl, dihydrofuranyl, fluorodihydrofuranyl, 7- oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiopyranyl, and the like. "Heterocyclenyl" may also mean a single moiety (e.g., carbonyl) which simultaneously replaces two available hydrogens on the same carbon atom on a ring system. Example of such moiety is pyrrolidinone:
Figure imgf000016_0001
"Heterocyclenylalkyl" means a heterocyclenyl moiety as defined above linked via an alkyl moiety (defined above) to a parent core. It should be noted that in hetero-atom containing ring systems of this invention, there are no hydroxyl groups on carbon atoms adjacent to a N, O or S, as well as there are no N or S groups on carbon adjacent to another heteroatom. Thus, for example, in the ring:
Figure imgf000017_0001
there is no -OH attached directly to carbons marked 2 and 5. It should also be noted that tautomeric forms such as, for example, the moieties:
Figure imgf000017_0002
are considered equivalent in certain embodiments of this invention.
"Alkynylalkyl" means an alkynyl-alkyl- group in which the alkynyl and alkyl are as previously described. Preferred alkynylalkyls contain a lower alkynyl and a lower alkyl group. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkynylalkyl groups include propargylmethyl. "Heteroaralkyl" means a heteroaryl-alkyl- group in which the heteroaryl and alkyl are as previously described. Preferred heteroaralkyls contain a lower alkyl group. Non-limiting examples of suitable aralkyl groups include pyridylmethyl, and quinolin-3-ylmethyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl.
"Hydroxyalkyl" means a HO-alkyl- group in which alkyl is as previously defined. Preferred hydroxyalkyls contain lower alkyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable hydroxyalkyl groups include hydroxymethyl and 2-hydroxyethyl.
"Acyl" means an H-C(O)-, alkyl-C(O)- or cycloalkyl-C(O)-, group in which the various groups are as previously described. The bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl. Preferred acyls contain a lower alkyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable acyl groups include formyl, acetyl and propanoyl. "Aroyl" means an aryl-C(O)- group in which the aryl group is as previously described. The bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl. Non-limiting examples of suitable groups include benzoyl and 1- naphthoyl.
"Alkoxy" means an alkyl-O- group in which the alkyl group is as previously described. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy and n-butoxy. The bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.
"Aryloxy" means an aryl-O- group in which the aryl group is as previously described. Non-limiting examples of suitable aryloxy groups include phenoxy and naphthoxy. The bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.
"Aralkyloxy" means an aralkyl-O- group in which the aralkyl group is as previously described. Non-limiting examples of suitable aralkyloxy groups include benzyloxy and 1- or 2-naphthalenemethoxy. The bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen. "Alkylthio" means an alkyl-S- group in which the alkyl group is as previously described. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkylthio groups include methylthio and ethylthio. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfur.
"Arylthio" means an aryl-S- group in which the aryl group is as previously described. Non-limiting examples of suitable arylthio groups include phenylthio and naphthylthio. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfur.
"Aralkylthio" means an aralkyl-S- group in which the aralkyl group is as previously described. Non-limiting example of a suitable aralkylthio group is benzylthio. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfur.
"Alkoxycarbonyl" means an alkyl-O-CO- group. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkoxycarbonyl groups include methoxycarbonyl and ethoxycarbonyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl.
"Aryloxycarbonyl" means an aryl-O-C(O)- group. Non-limiting examples of suitable aryloxycarbonyl groups include phenoxycarbonyl and naphthoxycarbonyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl. "Aralkoxycarbonyl" means an aralkyl-O-C(O)- group. Non-limiting example of a suitable aralkoxycarbonyl group is benzyloxycarbonyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the carbonyl. "Alkylsulfonyl" means an alkyl-S(O2)- group. Preferred groups are those in which the alkyl group is lower alkyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfonyl.
"Arylsulfonyl" means an aryl-S(O2)- group. The bond to the parent moiety is through the sulfonyl.
The term "substituted" means that one or more hydrogens on the designated atom is replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency under the existing circumstances is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound. Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds. By "stable compound' or "stable structure" is meant a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic agent.
The term "optionally substituted" means optional substitution with the specified groups, radicals or moieties.
The term "purified", "in purified form" or "in isolated and purified form" for a compound refers to the physical state of said compound after being isolated from a synthetic process (e.g. from a reaction mixture), or natural source or combination thereof. Thus, the term "purified", "in purified form" or "in isolated and purified form" for a compound refers to the physical state of said compound after being obtained from a purification process or processes described herein or well known to the skilled artisan (e.g., chromatography, recrystallization and the like) , in sufficient purity to be characterizable by standard analytical techniques described herein or well known to the skilled artisan. It should also be noted that any carbon as well as heteroatom with unsatisfied valences in the text, schemes, examples and Tables herein is assumed to have the sufficient number of hydrogen atom(s) to satisfy the valences.
When a functional group in a compound is termed "protected", this means that the group is in modified form to preclude undesired side reactions at the protected site when the compound is subjected to a reaction. Suitable protecting groups will be recognized by those with ordinary skill in the art as well as by reference to standard textbooks such as, for example, T. W. Greene et a/, Protective Groups in organic Synthesis (1991 ), Wiley, New York.
When any variable (e.g., aryl, heterocycle, R2, etc.) occurs more than one time in any constituent or in Formula I, its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence.
As used herein, the term "composition" is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. Prodrugs and solvates of the compounds of the invention are also contemplated herein. A discussion of prodrugs is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems (1987) 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, (1987) Edward B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press. The term "prodrug" means a compound (e.g, a drug precursor) that is transformed in vivo to yield a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate of the compound. The transformation may occur by various mechanisms (e.g., by metabolic or chemical processes), such as, for example, through hydrolysis in blood. A discussion of the use of prodrugs is provided by T. Higuchi and W. Stella, "Pro- drugs as Novel Delivery Systems," Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, ed. Edward B. Roche, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987.
For example, if a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate of the compound contains a carboxylic acid functional group, a prodrug can comprise an ester formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the acid group with a group such as, for example, (d-CβJalkyl, (C2- Ci2)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-(alkanoyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 9 carbon atoms, 1- methyl-1-(alkanoyloxy)-ethyl having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, 1 - (alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 7 carbon atoms, 1-methyl-1- (alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 5 to 8 carbon atoms, N- (alkoxycarbonyl)aminomethyl having from 3 to 9 carbon atoms, 1-(N- (alkoxycarbonyl)amino)ethyl having from 4 to 10 carbon atoms, 3-phthalidyl, 4- crotonolactonyl, gamma-butyrolacton-4-yl, di-N,N-(CrC2)alkylamino(C2-C3)alkyl (such as /?-dimethylaminoethyl), carbamoyl-(CrC2)alkyl, N,N-di (Cr C2)alkylcarbamoyl-(C1-C2)alkyl and piperidino-, pyrrolidino- or morpholino(C2- C3)alkyl, and the like.
Similarly, if a compound of Formula (I) contains an alcohol functional group, a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as, for example, (C1-Ce)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((Cr C6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((CrC6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (Cr C6)alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N-(CrC6)alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (Cr C6)alkanoyl, α-amino(CrC4)alkanyl, arylacyl and α-aminoacyl, or α-aminoacyl-α- aminoacyl, where each α-aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, P(O)(OH)2, -P(O)(O(CrC6)alkyl)2 or glycosyl (the radical resulting from the removal of a hydroxyl group of the hemiacetal form of a carbohydrate), and the like.
If a compound of Formula (I) incorporates an amine functional group, a prodrug can be formed by the replacement of a hydrogen atom in the amine group with a group such as, for example, R-carbonyl, RO-carbonyl, NRR'-carbonyl where R and R' are each independently (CrCio)alkyl, (Cs-C7) cycloalkyl, benzyl, or R- carbonyl is a natural α-aminoacyl or natural α-aminoacyl, — C(OH)C(O)OY1 wherein Y1 is H, (CrCe)alkyl or benzyl, — C(OY2)Y3 wherein Y2 is (CrC4) alky! and Y3 is (C1- C6)alkyl, carboxy (CrC6)alkyl, amino(Ci-C4)alkyl or mono-N — or di-N,N-(Cr C6)alkylaminoalkyl, — C(Y4)Y5 wherein Y4 is H or methyl and Y5 is mono-N — or di- N,N-(CrC6)alkylamino morpholino, piperidin-1-yl or pyrrolidin-1-yl, and the like. One or more compounds of the invention may exist in unsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like, and it is intended that the invention embrace both solvated and unsolvated forms. "Solvate" means a physical association of a compound of this invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. "Solvate" encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include ethanolates, methanolates, and the like. "Hydrate" is a solvate wherein the solvent molecule is H2O.
One or more compounds of the invention may optionally be converted to a solvate. Preparation of solvates is generally known. Thus, for example, M. Caira et a/, J. Pharmaceutical Sci,, 93(3), 601-611 (2004) describe the preparation of the solvates of the antifungal fluconazole in ethyl acetate as well as from water. Similar preparations of solvates, hemisolvate, hydrates and the like are described by E. C. van Tonder et al, AAPS PharmSciTech., 5(1), article 12 (2004); and A. L. Bingham et a/, Chem. Commun., 603-604 (2001 ). A typical, non-limiting, process involves dissolving the inventive compound in desired amounts of the desired solvent (organic or water or mixtures thereof) at a higher than ambient temperature, and cooling the solution at a rate sufficient to form crystals which are then isolated by standard methods. Analytical techniques such as, for example I. R. spectroscopy, show the presence of the solvent (or water) in the crystals as a solvate (or hydrate). "Effective amount" or "therapeutically effective amount" is meant to describe an amount of compound or a composition of the present invention effective in inhibiting the above-noted diseases and thus producing the desired therapeutic, ameliorative, inhibitory or preventative effect. The compounds of Formula I can form salts which are also within the scope of this invention. Reference to a compound of Formula I herein is understood to include reference to salts thereof, unless otherwise indicated. The term "salt(s)", as employed herein, denotes acidic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic acids, as well as basic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic bases. In addition, when a compound of Formula I contains both a basic moiety, such as, but not limited to a pyridine or imidazole, and an acidic moiety, such as, but not limited to a carboxylic acid, zwitterions ("inner salts") may be formed and are included within the term "salt(s)" as used herein. Pharmaceutically acceptable (i.e., non-toxic, physiologically acceptable) salts are preferred, although other salts are also useful. Salts of the compounds of the Formula I may be formed, for example, by reacting a compound of Formula I with an amount of acid or base, such as an equivalent amount, in a medium such as one in which the salt precipitates or in an aqueous medium followed by lyophilization.
Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates, ascorbates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, fumarates, hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, hydroiodides, lactates, maleates, methanesulfonates, naphthalenesulfonates, nitrates, oxalates, phosphates, propionates, salicylates, succinates, sulfates, tartarates, thiocyanates, toluenesulfonates (also known as tosylates,) and the like. Additionally, acids which are generally considered suitable for the formation of pharmaceutically useful salts from basic pharmaceutical compounds are discussed, for example, by P. Stahl et a/, Camille G. (eds.) Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts. Properties, Selection and Use. (2002) Zurich: Wiley-VCH; S. Berge et a/, Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences (1977) 66(1) 1-19; P. Gould, International J. of Pharmaceutics (1986) 33 201-217; Anderson et a/, The Practice of Medicinal Chemistry (1996), Academic Press, New York; and in The Orange Book (Food & Drug Administration, Washington, D. C. on their website). These disclosures are incorporated herein by reference thereto.
Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts, salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as dicyclohexylamines, t-butyl amines, and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like. Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quarternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g. methyl, ethyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g. dimethyl, diethyl, and dibutyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g. decyl, lauryl, and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g. benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.
All such acid salts and base salts are intended to be pharmaceutically acceptable salts within the scope of the invention and all acid and base salts are considered equivalent to the free forms of the corresponding compounds for purposes of the invention. Pharmaceutically acceptable esters of the present compounds include the following groups: (1) carboxylic acid esters obtained by esterification of the hydroxy groups, in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the carboxylic acid portion of the ester grouping is selected from straight or branched chain alkyl (for example, acetyl, n- propyl, t-butyl, or n-butyl), alkoxyalkyl (for example, methoxymethyl), aralkyl (for example, benzyl), aryloxyalkyl (for example, phenoxymethyl), aryl (for example, phenyl optionally substituted with, for example, halogen, Ci^alkyl, or Ci-4alkoxy or amino); (2) sulfonate esters, such as alkyl- or aralkylsulfonyl (for example, methanesulfonyl); (3) amino acid esters (for example, L-valyl or L-isoleucyl); (4) phosphonate esters and (5) mono-, di- or triphosphate esters. The phosphate esters may be further esterified by, for example, a C-ι-2o alcohol or reactive derivative thereof, or by a 2,3-di (C6-24)acyl glycerol. Compounds of Formula I, and salts, solvates, esters and prodrugs thereof, may exist in their tautomeric form (for example, as an amide or imino ether). All such tautomeric forms are contemplated herein as part of the present invention.
The compounds of Formula (I) may contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and, therefore, exist in different stereoisomers forms. It is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of Formula (I) as well as mixtures thereof, including racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention. In addition, the present invention embraces all geometric and positional isomers. For example, if a compound of Formula (I) incorporates a double bond or a fused ring, both the cis- and trans-forms, as well as mixtures, are embraced within the scope of the invention. Diastereomeric mixtures can be separated into their individual diastereomers on the basis of their physical chemical differences by methods well known to those skilled in the art, such as, for example, by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization. Enantiomers can be separated by converting the enantiomeric mixture into a diastereomeric mixture by reaction with an appropriate optically active compound (e.g., chiral auxiliary such as a chiral alcohol or Mosher's acid chloride), separating the diastereomers and converting (e.g., hydrolyzing) the individual diastereomers to the corresponding pure enantiomers. Also, some of the compounds of Formula (I) may be atropisomers (e.g., substituted biaryls) and are considered as part of this invention. Enantiomers can also be separated by use of chiral HPLC column.
It is also possible that the compounds of Formula (I) may exist in different tautomeric forms, and all such forms are embraced within the scope of the invention. Also, for example, all keto-enol and imine-enamine forms of the compounds are included in the invention.
All stereoisomers (for example, geometric isomers, optical isomers and the like) of the present compounds (including those of the salts, solvates, esters and prodrugs of the compounds as well as the salts, solvates and esters of the prodrugs), such as those which may exist due to asymmetric carbons on various substituents, including enantiomeric forms (which may exist even in the absence of asymmetric carbons), rotameric forms, atropisomers, and diastereomeric forms, are contemplated within the scope of this invention, as are positional isomers (such as, for example, 4-pyridyl and 3-pyridyl). (For example, if a compound of Formula (I) incorporates a double bond or a fused ring, both the cis- and trans-forms, as well as mixtures, are embraced within the scope of the invention. Also, for example, all keto- enol and imine-enamine forms of the compounds are included in the invention.).
Individual stereoisomers of the compounds of the invention may, for example, be substantially free of other isomers, or may be admixed, for example, as racemates or with all other, or other selected, stereoisomers. The chiral centers of the present invention can have the S or R configuration as defined by the IUPAC 1974 Recommendations. The use of the terms "salt", "solvate", "ester", "prodrug" and the like, is intended to equally apply to the salt, solvate, ester and prodrug of enantiomers, stereoisomers, rotamers, tautomers, positional isomers, racemates or prodrugs of the inventive compounds.
The present invention also embraces isotopically-labelled compounds of the present invention which are identical to those recited herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 13C, 14C, 15N, 180, 170, 31P, 32P, 35S, 18F, and 36CI, respectively. Certain isotopically-labelled compounds of Formula (I) (e.g., those labeled with 3H and 14C) are useful in compound and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated (i.e., 3H) and carbon-14 (i.e., 14C) isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability (e.g., increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements) and hence may be preferred in some circumstances, lsotopically labelled compounds of Formula (I) can generally be prepared by following procedures analogous to those disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples hereinbelow, by substituting an appropriate isotopically labelled reagent for a non- isotopically labelled reagent.
Polymorphic forms of the compounds of Formula I, and of the salts, solvates, esters and prodrugs of the compounds of Formula I, are intended to be included in the present invention.
As used herein, amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disorder by administration of a particular compound or pharmaceutical composition refers to any lessening, whether permanent or temporary, lasting or transient that can be attributed to or associated with administration of the composition. As used herein, IC50 refers to an amount, concentration or dosage of a particular test compound that achieves a 50% inhibition of a maximal response, such as modulation of CDK-2 kinase activity, in an assay that measures such response.
As used herein, EC50 refers to a dosage, concentration or amount of a particular test compound that elicits a dose-dependent response at 50% of maximal expression of a particular response that is induced, provoked or potentiated by the particular test compound.
In the case of amino acid residues, such residues may be of either the L- or D-form. The configuration for naturally occurring amino acid residues is generally L. When not specified the residue is the L form. As used herein, the term "amino acid" refers to α-amino acids which are racemic, or of either the D- or L-configuration. The designation "d" preceding an amino acid designation (e.g., dAla, dSer, dVal, etc.) refers to the D-isomer of the amino acid. The designation "dl" preceding an amino acid designation (e.g., dlPip) refers to a mixture of the L- and D-isomers of the amino acid. It is to be understood that the chiral centers of the compounds provided herein may undergo epimerization in vivo. As such, one of skill in the art will recognize that administration of a compound in its (R) form is equivalent, for compounds that undergo epimerization in vivo, to administration of the compound in its (S) form. As used herein, substantially pure means sufficiently homogeneous to appear free of readily detectable impurities as determined by standard methods of analysis, such as thin layer chromatography (TLC), gel electrophoresis, high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and mass spectrometry (MS), used by those of skill in the art to assess such purity, or sufficiently pure such that further purification would not detectably alter the physical and chemical properties, such as enzymatic and biological activities, of the substance. Methods for purification of the compounds to produce substantially chemically pure compounds are known to those of skill in the art. A substantially chemically pure compound may, however, be a mixture of stereoisomers. In such instances, further purification might increase the specific activity of the compound.
The term "purified", "in purified form" or "in isolated and purified form" for a compound refers to the physical state of said compound after being isolated from a synthetic process or natural source or combination thereof. Thus, the term "purified", "in purified form" or "in isolated and purified form" for a compound refers to the physical state of said compound after being obtained from a purification process or processes described herein or well known to the skilled artisan, in sufficient purity to be characterizable by standard analytical techniques described herein or well known to the skilled artisan. As used herein, "haloalkoxy" refers to RO- in which R is a haloalkyl group.
As used herein, "heterocyclyloxy", refers to RO- in which R is a heterocyclyl group, heteroaryloxy refers to RO- in which R is a heteroaryl group.
As used herein, "substituted alkyl," "substituted alkenyl," "substituted alkynyl," "substituted cycloalkyl," "substituted cycloalkenyl," "substituted cycloalkynyl," "substituted aryl," "substituted heteroaryl," "substituted heterocyclyl," "substituted alkylene," "substituted alkenylene," "substituted alkynylene," "substituted cycloalkylene," "substituted cycloalkenylene," "substituted cycloalkynylene," "substituted arylene," "substituted heteroarylene" and "substituted heterocyclylene" refer to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkylene, cycloalkenylene, cycloalkynylene, arylene, heteroarylene and heterocyclylene groups, respectively, that are substituted with one or more substituents, in certain embodiments one, two, three or four substituents, where the substituents are as defined herein, for example, in one embodiment selected from Q1.
As used herein, "amido" refers to the divalent group -C(O)NH-. "Thioamido" refers to the divalent group -C(S)NH-. "Oxyamido" refers to the divalent group - OC(O)NH-. "Thiaamido" refers to the divalent group -SC(O)NH-. "Dithiaamido" refers to the divalent group -SC(S)NH-. "Ureido" refers to the divalent group - HNC(O)NH-. "Thioureido" refers to the divalent group -HNC(S)NH-.
Where the number of any given substituent is not specified (e.g., haloalkyl), there may be one or more substituents present. For example, "haloalkyl" may include one or more of the same or different halogens. As another example,
"Ci_3alkoxyphenyl" may include one or more of the same or different alkoxy groups containing one, two or three carbons.
As used herein, the abbreviations for any protective groups, amino acids and other compounds, are, unless indicated otherwise, in accord with their common usage, recognized abbreviations, or the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see, (1972) Biochem. '/ 7:942-944). Certain of the abbreviations used herein are listed below. B. Compounds
In one embodiment, the compounds provided herein for use in the compositions and methods provided herein have formula I, where the variables are as described below. All combinations of such embodiments are within the scope of the instant disclosure.
In one embodiment:
R0 is -(CH2)nR4; where n = 1-3 and R4 is independently hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryl, dialkylamino, dihydroxyaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyaryl, haloaryl, or nitroaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, -(CHz)nOR5, -(CH2)nN(R5)2, -C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=NOR5; where n = 1-3 and R5 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino;
R2 is hydrogen, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -(C(O)N(R6)2), heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl; where R6 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; and R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkenyl, alkylalkenyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkynyl, alkylalkynyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, phenyl, aryl,alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryloxyaryl, oxaalkyl, alkyloxa, thiaalkyl, alkylthia heteroaryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylcycloalkyl, CH=CHR7, C ≡CR7, C6H4CH2OR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4OR7, C6H4CH2SR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4SR7, heterocyclyl, alkoxy, OCH2R7, or CH2OR7; and where R7 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
In another embodiment, the groups R0, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7,and R8 are selected such that the resulting compound has an inhibitory effect on CDK-2. In another embodiment,
R0 is -(CH2)nR4; where n = 1-3 and R4 is independently hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryl, dialkylamino, dihydroxyaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyaryl, haloaryl, or nitroaryl; R1 is -CO2R5, -(CHz)nOR5, -(CH2)nN(R5)2, -C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=NOR5; where n =
1-3 and R5 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino;
R2 is hydrogen, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -(C(O)N(R6)2), heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl; where R6 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; and
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkenyl, alkylalkenyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkynyl, alkylalkynyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, phenyl, aryl, alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryloxyaryl, oxaalkyl, alkyloxa, thiaalkyl, alkylthia heteroaryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylcycloalkyl, CH=CHR7, C≡CR7, C6H4CH2OR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4OR7, C6H4CH2SR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4SR7, heterocyclyl, alkoxy, OCH2R7, or CH2OR7; and where R7 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino. In another embodiment, R0 is
Figure imgf000030_0001
where each R7 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro or halo; and n is 0, 1 or 2.
In another embodiment, R° is
Figure imgf000030_0002
where each R is hydrogen, or alkyl. In another embodiment, R0 is:
W 2
30
Figure imgf000031_0001
In another embodiment, R0 is:
Figure imgf000031_0002
In another embodiment, R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxyoxo, aminoalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, carboxy, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, oxo, -CO2R5, -C(O)N(R5)2,
-CH2NHCH2CH2N(CH3)2, or -C=NOR5, where R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
In another embodiment, R1 is -CO2R5, -(CH2)nOR5, -(CH2)nN(R5)2, - C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=NOR5, where n = 1-3. In another embodiment, R1 is:
Figure imgf000031_0003
H,
Figure imgf000032_0001
In another embodiment, R 1 i !s„:•
Figure imgf000032_0002
In another embodiment, R1 is:
Figure imgf000032_0003
In another embodiment, R1 is:
Figure imgf000032_0004
In another embodiment, R1 is -C(O)OCH3.
In another embodiment, R1 is -CH2OCH3.
In another embodiment, R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, carboxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylsulfonamido, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, ~C(O)N(Rδ)2, or - C(O)NHC(R6)C(O)R6; where R6 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
In another embodiment, R2 is hydrogen, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, - SO2R6, -C(O)N(R6)2, or -C(O)NHC(R6)C(O)R6; where R6 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
In another embodiment, R2 is:
Figure imgf000033_0001
In another embodiment, R is:
Figure imgf000033_0002
Figure imgf000034_0001
In another embodiment, R2 is
Figure imgf000034_0002
In another embodiment, R2 is
Figure imgf000035_0001
In another embodiment, R2 is -COOH. In another embodiment, R2 is -NHS(O)2C(CH3)3. In another embodiment, R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, arylcycloalkyl, aryloxyaryl, aminoaryl, aminoalkylaryl, alkyloxa, alkylthia, cyanoalkynyl, cyanoaryl, cycloalkyl, haloaryl, haloarylalkyl, haloarylalkenyl, haloalkylaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyaryl, thiaalkyl, heteroaryl, nitroaryl, oxaalkyl, or oxaalkynyl -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, or - (C(O)N(R6)2), with R6 being hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino, wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and is independently selected from Q3. In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000035_0002
where n is 1 or 2 and Q1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, -NHC(O), - S(O)2NH1 Or -NHS(O)2.
In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000036_0001
where n is 1 or 2; Q1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, -NHC(O), S(O)2NH, or -NHS(O)2; and
L is -CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-, -C≡C-, -CH2O-, Or -OCH2-. in another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000036_0002
Figure imgf000036_0003
In another embodiment, R 3 i;s^:.
Figure imgf000037_0001
In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000037_0002
where A is O or S.
In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000037_0003
where X is halo. In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000038_0001
where X is halo or CF3 and A is O or S. In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000038_0002
In another embodiment, R3 is
Figure imgf000039_0001
In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000039_0002
another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000040_0001
In another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000040_0002
another embodiment, R3 is:
Figure imgf000041_0001
In another embodiment,
R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is haloalkylaryl.
In another embodiment,
R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is arylcycloalkyl.
In another embodiment,
R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is haloalkoxyaryl.
In another embodiment,
R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is alkyl.
In another embodiment,
R0 is hydroxyaryl; R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is haloarylalkyl.
In another embodiment, R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is haloarylalkenyl.
In another embodiment, R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is haloarylalkyl.
In another embodiment, R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is alkenyl.
In another embodiment, R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is alkynyl.
In another embodiment, R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is heteroarylalkylaryl.
In another embodiment, the compounds for use in the compositions and methods provided herein have the formulae shown in Table 1. Table 1 lists representative compounds with their molecular structure (with hydrogen atoms bound to carbon and to secondary nitrogen omitted) and their inhibitory effectiveness toward CDK-2. In Table 1, under IC50, "A" represents an IC5O of <1 μM; "B" of > 1 μM but < 40 μM; and "C" of ≥40 μM).
Table 1: Representative Compounds of the Invention
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
Figure imgf000053_0001
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000055_0001
Figure imgf000056_0001
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000059_0001
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000070_0001
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000072_0001
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
Figure imgf000092_0001
Figure imgf000093_0001
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
C. Preparation of the Compounds
The compounds described herein can be obtained from commercial sources or synthesized by conventional methods as shown below using commercially available starting materials and reagents. For example, the compounds can be made using the chemical scheme provided below:
Figure imgf000103_0001
Where PG - Carboxyl protoecting group such as silyl esters, alkyl esters, etc. AG - Carboxyl activating group such as NHS, PFP etc. M- metal or metal ion X- halide
lodostatin 1, can be converted to the dicarboxylic acid 2, using pyruvic acid and KOH. R3 can be inserted using standard coupling with the corresponding boronic acid derivative. Suitable protection of the caroboxyl on C4 and activation of the C2 carboxyl followed by coupling with 6, yields 7. 6 may be commercially available or can be synthesized using standard synthetic conditions as known to one of ordinary skill in the art, to make the preferred R0 and R1 substituents. 7 can be converted to 8, 9, 10, or 11, using the conditions shown above. Each of the above pathways allows the introduction of R2 as desired.
The compounds described herein can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high-pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
The compounds according to the invention have pharmacological properties; in particular, the compounds of Formula I can be inhibitors of protein kinases such as, for example, the inhibitors of the cyclin-dependent kinases, mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK/ERK), glycogen synthase kinase 3(GSK3beta) and the like. The cyclin dependent kinases (CDKs) include, for example, CDC2 (CDK1), CDK2, CDK4, CDK5, CDK6, CDK7 and CDK8. The novel compounds of Formula I are expected to be useful in the therapy of proliferative diseases such as cancer, autoimmune diseases, viral diseases, fungal diseases, neurological/neurodegenerative disorders, arthritis, inflammation, anti-proliferative (e.g., ocular retinopathy), neuronal, alopecia and cardiovascular disease. Many of these diseases and disorders are listed in U.S. 6,413,974 cited earlier, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein. More specifically, the compounds of Formula I can be useful in the treatment of a variety of cancers, including (but not limited to) the following: carcinoma, including that of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, including small cell lung cancer, esophagus, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid, prostate, and skin, including squamous cell carcinoma; hematopoietic tumors of lymphoid lineage, including leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma, T- cell lymphoma, Hodgkins lymphoma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma and Burkett's lymphoma; hematopoietic tumors of myeloid lineage, including acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, myelodysplastic syndrome and promyelocytic leukemia; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosarcoma and rhabdomyosarcoma; tumors of the central and peripheral nervous system, including astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma and schwannomas; and other tumors, including melanoma, seminoma, teratocarcinoma, osteosarcoma, xenoderoma pigmentosum, keratoctanthoma, thyroid follicular cancer and Kaposi's sarcoma. Due to the key role of CDKs in the regulation of cellular proliferation in general, inhibitors could act as reversible cytostatic agents which may be useful in the treatment of any disease process which features abnormal cellular proliferation, e.g., benign prostate hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neurofibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, and fungal infections.
Compounds of Formula I can also be useful in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, as suggested by the recent finding that CDK5 is involved in the phosphorylation of tau protein (J. Biochem, (1995) 117, 741-749).
Compounds of Formula I may induce or inhibit apoptosis. The apoptotic response is aberrant in a variety of human diseases. Compounds of Formula I, as modulators of apoptosis, will be useful in the treatment of cancer (including but not limited to those types mentioned hereinabove), viral infections (including but not limited to herpevirus, poxvirus, Epstein- Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus), prevention of AIDS development in HIV-infected individuals, autoimmune diseases (including but not limited to systemic lupus, erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, and autoimmune diabetes mellitus), neurodegenerative disorders (including but not limited to Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy and cerebellar degeneration), myelodysplastic syndromes, aplastic anemia, ischemic injury associated with myocardial infarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia, atherosclerosis, toxin-induced or alcohol related liver diseases, hematological diseases (including but not limited to chronic anemia and aplastic anemia), degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system (including but not limited to osteoporosis and arthritis) aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain.
Compounds of Formula I, as inhibitors of the CDKs, can modulate the level of cellular RNA and DNA synthesis. These agents would therefore be useful in the treatment of viral infections (including but not limited to HIV, human papilloma virus, herpesvirus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus).
Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in the chemoprevention of cancer. Chemoprevention is defined as inhibiting the development of invasive cancer by either blocking the initiating mutagenic event or by blocking the progression of pre-malignant cells that have already suffered an insult or inhibiting tumor relapse. Compounds of Formula I may also be useful in inhibiting tumor angiogenesis and metastasis.
Compounds of Formula I may also act as inhibitors of other protein kinases, e.g., protein kinase C, her2, raf 1 , MEK1 , MAP kinase, EGF receptor, PDGF receptor, IGF receptor, PI3 kinase, weel kinase, Src, AbI and thus be effective in the treatment of diseases associated with other protein kinases.
Thus, another aspect of this invention is a method of treating a mammal (e.g., human) having a disease or condition associated with the CDKs by administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound to the mammal. The compounds of this invention may also be useful in combination with one or more of anti-cancer treatments such as radiation therapy, and/or one or more anticancer agents selected from the group consisting of cytostatic agents, cytotoxic agents (such as for example, but not limited to, DNA interactive agents (such as cisplatin or doxorubicin)); taxanes (e.g. taxotere, taxol); topoisomerase Il inhibitors (such as etoposide); topoisomerase I inhibitors (such as irinotecan (or CPT-11), camptostar, or topotecan); tubulin interacting agents (such as paclitaxel, docetaxel or the epothilones); hormonal agents (such as tamoxifen); thymidilate synthase inhibitors (such as 5-fluorouracil); anti-metabolites (such as methoxtrexate); alkylating agents (such as temozolomide (TEMODAR™ from Schering-Plough Corporation, Kenilworth, New Jersey), cyclophosphamide); Farnesyl protein transferase inhibitors (such as, SARASAR™(4-[2-[4-[(11 R)-3,10-dibromo-8-chloro- 6,11-dihydro-5H-benzo[5,6]cyclohepta[1 ,2-b]pyridin-11-yl-]~1-piperidinyl]-2-oxoehtyl]- 1-piperidinecarboxamide, or SCH 66336 from Schering-Plough Corporation, Kenilworth, New Jersey), tipifamib (Zamestra® or R115777 from Janssen Pharmaceuticals), L778.123 (a farnesyl protein transferase inhibitor from Merck & Company, Whitehouse Station, New Jersey), BMS 214662 (a farnesyl protein transferase inhibitor from Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharmaceuticals, Princeton, New Jersey); signal transduction inhibitors (such as, lressa (from Astra Zeneca Pharmaceuticals, England), Tarceva (EGFR kinase inhibitors), antibodies to EGFR (e.g., C225), GLEEVEC™ (C-abl kinase inhibitor from Novartis Pharmaceuticals, East Hanover, New Jersey); interferons such as, for example, intron (from Schering- Plough Corporation), Peg-lntron (from Schering-Plough Corporation); hormonal therapy combinations; aromatase combinations; ara-C, adriamycin, Cytoxan, and gemcitabine.
Other anti-cancer (also known as anti-neoplastic) agents include but are not limited to Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Ifosfamide, Melphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylenemelamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, Dacarbazine, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, 6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, oxaliplatin, leucovirin, oxaliplatin (ELOXATI N™ from Sanofi-Synthelabo Pharmaeuticals, France), Pentostatine, Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Idarubicin, Mithramycin, Deoxycoformycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Teniposide 17α-Ethinylestradiol, Diethylstilbestrol, Testosterone, Prednisone, Fluoxymesterone, Dromostanolone propionate, Testolactone, Megestrolacetate, Methylprednisolone, Methyltestosterone, Prednisolone, Triamcinolone, Chlorotrianisene, Hydroxyprogesterone, Aminoglutethimide, Estramustine, Medroxyprogesteroneacetate, Leuprolide, Flutamide, Toremifene, goserelin, Cisplatin, Carboplatin, Hydroxyurea, Amsacrine, Procarbazine, Mitotane, Mitoxantrone, Levamisole, Navelbene, Anastrazole, Letrazoie, Capecitabine, Reloxafine, Droloxafine, or Hexamethylmelamine.
When administering a combination therapy to a patient in need of such administration, the therapeutic agents in the combination, or a pharmaceutical composition or compositions comprising the therapeutic agents, may be administered in any order such as, for example, sequentially, concurrently, together, simultaneously and the like. The amounts of the various actives in such combination therapy may be different amounts (different dosage amounts) or same amounts (same dosage amounts). Thus, for non-limiting illustration purposes, a compound of Formula I and an additional therapeutic agent may be present in fixed amounts (dosage amounts) in a single dosage unit (e.g., a capsule, a tablet and the like). A commercial example of such single dosage unit containing fixed amounts of two different active compounds for oral administration is VYTORIN® (available from Merck Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Kenilworth, New Jersey).
If formulated as a fixed dose, such combination products employ the compounds of this invention within the dosage range described herein and the other pharmaceutically active agent or treatment within its dosage range. For example, the CDC2 inhibitor olomucine has been found to act synergistically with known cytotoxic agents in inducing apoptosis (J. Cell ScL, (1995) 108, 2897. Compounds of Formula I may also be administered sequentially with known anticancer or cytotoxic agents when a combination formulation is inappropriate. The invention is not limited in the sequence of administration; compounds of Formula I may be administered either prior to or after administration of the known anticancer or cytotoxic agent. For example, the cytotoxic activity of the cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor flavopiridol is affected by the sequence of administration with anticancer agents. Cancer Research, (1997) 57, 3375. Such techniques are within the skills of persons skilled in the art as well as attending physicians. Accordingly, in an aspect, this invention includes combinations comprising an amount of at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, and an amount of one or more anti-cancer treatments and anticancer agents listed above wherein the amounts of the compounds/ treatments result in desired therapeutic effect.
The pharmacological properties of the compounds of this invention may be confirmed by a number of pharmacological assays. The exemplified pharmacological assays which are described later have been carried out with the compounds according to the invention and their salts. This invention is also directed to pharmaceutical compositions which comprise at least one compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of said compound and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. D. Formulation of pharmaceutical compositions
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein contain therapeutically effective amounts of one or more of the compounds provided herein that are useful in the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of one or more of the symptoms of diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2, in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2 include, but are not limited to, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, cancer and diabetes. Pharmaceutical carriers suitable for administration of the compounds provided herein include any such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration.
In addition, the compounds may be formulated as the sole pharmaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be combined with other active ingredients.
The compositions contain one or more compounds provided herein. The compounds are, in one embodiment, formulated into suitable pharmaceutical preparations such as solutions, suspensions, tablets, dispersible tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained release formulations or elixirs, for oral administration or in sterile solutions or suspensions for parenteral administration, as well as transdermal patch preparation and dry powder inhalers. In one embodiment, the compounds described above are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using techniques and procedures well known in the art (see, e.g., Ansel Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Fourth Edition 1985, 126).
In the compositions, effective concentrations of one or more compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof is (are) mixed with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier. The compounds may be derivatized as the corresponding salts, esters, enol ethers or esters, acetals, ketals, orthoesters, hemiacetals, hemiketals, acids, bases, solvates, hydrates or prodrugs prior to formulation, as described above. The concentrations of the compounds in the compositions are effective for delivery of an amount, upon administration, that treats, prevents, or ameliorates one or more of the symptoms of diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2 activity or in which CDK-2 activity is implicated.
In one embodiment, the compositions are formulated for single dosage administration. To formulate a composition, the weight fraction of compound is dissolved, suspended, dispersed or otherwise mixed in a selected carrier at an effective concentration such that the treated condition is relieved, prevented, or one or more symptoms are ameliorated.
The active compound is included in the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful effect in the absence of undesirable side effects on the patient treated. The therapeutically effective concentration may be determined empirically by testing the compounds using in vitro and in vivo systems described herein and then extrapolated therefrom for dosages for humans.
The concentration of active compound in the pharmaceutical composition will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the active compound, the physicochemical characteristics of the compound, the dosage schedule, and amount administered as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. For example, the amount that is delivered is sufficient to ameliorate one or more of the symptoms of diseases or disorders associated with CDK-2 activity or in which CDK-2 activity is implicated, as described herein. In one embodiment, a therapeutically effective dosage should produce a serum concentration of active ingredient of from about 0.1 ng/ml to about 50- 100 μg/ml. The pharmaceutical compositions, in another embodiment, should provide a dosage of from about 0.001 mg to about 2000 mg of compound per kilogram of body weight per day. Pharmaceutical dosage unit forms are prepared to provide from about 0.01 mg, 0.1 mg or 1 mg to about 500mg, 1000 mg or 2000 mg, and in one embodiment from about 10 mg to about 500 mg of the active ingredient or a combination of essential ingredients per dosage unit form.
The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the disease being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed compositions.
In instances in which the compounds exhibit insufficient solubility, methods for solubilizing compounds may be used. Such methods are known to those of skill in this art, and include, but are not limited to, using cosolvents, such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), using surfactants, such as TWEEN®, or dissolution in aqueous sodium bicarbonate. Derivatives of the compounds, such as prodrugs of the compounds may also be used in formulating effective pharmaceutical compositions.
Upon mixing or addition of the compound(s), the resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsion or the like. The form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the disease, disorder or condition treated and may be empirically determined. The pharmaceutical compositions are provided for administration to humans and animals in unit dosage forms, such as tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granules, sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions, and oral solutions or suspensions, and oil-water emulsions containing suitable quantities of the compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof. The pharmaceutically therapeutically active compounds and derivatives thereof are, in one embodiment, formulated and administered in unit-dosage forms or multiple- dosage forms. Unit-dose forms as used herein refers to physically discrete units suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged individually as is known in the art. Each unit-dose contains a predetermined quantity of the therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier, vehicle or diluent. Examples of unit-dose forms include ampoules and syringes and individually packaged tablets or capsules. Unit- dose forms may be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. A multiple-dose form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit-dose form. Examples of multiple-dose forms include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules or bottles of pints or gallons. Hence, multiple dose form is a multiple of unit-doses which are not segregated in packaging.
Liquid pharmaceutically administrable compositions can, for example, be prepared by dissolving, dispersing, or otherwise mixing an active compound as defined above and optional pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol, and the like, to thereby form a solution or suspension. If desired, the pharmaceutical composition to be administered may also contain minor amounts of nontoxic auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents.
Actual methods of preparing such dosage forms are known, or will be apparent, to those skilled in this art; for example, see Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 15th Edition, 1975.
Dosage forms or compositions containing active ingredient in the range of 0.005% to 100% with the balance made up from non-toxic carrier may be prepared. Methods for preparation of these compositions are known to those skilled in the art. The contemplated compositions may contain 0.001 %-100% active ingredient, in one embodiment 0.1-95%, in another embodiment 75-85%. 1. Compositions for oral administration
Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms are either solid, gel or liquid. The solid dosage forms are tablets, capsules, granules, and bulk powders. Types of oral tablets include compressed, chewable lozenges and tablets which may be enteric- coated, sugar-coated or film-coated. Capsules may be hard or soft gelatin capsules, while granules and powders may be provided in non-effervescent or effervescent form with the combination of other ingredients known to those skilled in the art. a. Solid compositions for oral administration
In certain embodiments, the formulations are solid dosage forms, in one embodiment, capsules or tablets. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain one or more of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder; a lubricant; a diluent; a glidant; a disintegrating agent; a coloring agent; a sweetening agent; a flavoring agent; a wetting agent; an emetic coating; and a film coating. Examples of binders include microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth, glucose solution, acacia mucilage, gelatin solution, molasses, polvinylpyrrolidine, povidone, crospovidones, sucrose and starch paste. Lubricants include talc, starch, magnesium or calcium stearate, lycopodium and stearic acid. Diluents include, for example, lactose, sucrose, starch, kaolin, salt, mannitol and dicalcium phosphate. Glidants include, but are not limited to, colloidal silicon dioxide. Disintegrating agents include crosscarmellose sodium, sodium starch glycolate, alginic acid, corn starch, potato starch, bentonite, methylcellulose, agar and carboxymethylcellulose. Coloring agents include, for example, any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, mixtures thereof; and water insoluble FD and C dyes suspended on alumina hydrate. Sweetening agents include sucrose, lactose, mannitol and artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin, and any number of spray dried flavors. Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such as fruits and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant sensation, such as, but not limited to peppermint and methyl salicylate. Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene laural ether. Emetic-coatings include fatty acids, fats, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac and cellulose acetate phthalates.
Film coatings include hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000 and cellulose acetate phthalate.
The compound, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, could be provided in a composition that protects it from the acidic environment of the stomach.
For example, the composition can be formulated in an enteric coating that maintains its integrity in the stomach and releases the active compound in the intestine. The composition may also be formulated in combination with an antacid or other such ingredient. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it can contain, in addition to material of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, dosage unit forms can contain various other materials which modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar and other enteric agents. The compounds can also be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, sprinkle, chewing gum or the like. A syrup may contain, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.
The active materials can also be mixed with other active materials which do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antacids, H2 blockers, and diuretics. The active ingredient is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof as described herein. Higher concentrations, up to about 98% by weight of the active ingredient may be included. In all embodiments, tablets and capsules formulations may be coated as known by those of skill in the art in order to modify or sustain dissolution of the active ingredient. Thus, for example, they may be coated with a conventional enterically digestible coating, such as phenylsalicylate, waxes and cellulose acetate phthalate. b. Liquid compositions for oral administration Liquid oral dosage forms include aqueous solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutions and/or suspensions reconstituted from non-effervescent granules and effervescent preparations reconstituted from effervescent granules. Aqueous solutions include, for example, elixirs and syrups. Emulsions are either oil-in-water or water-in-oil. Elixirs are clear, sweetened, hydroalcoholic preparations. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in elixirs include solvents. Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may contain a preservative. An emulsion is a two-phase system in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in emulsions are non-aqueous liquids, emulsifying agents and preservatives. Suspensions use pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agents and preservatives. Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in non-effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, include diluents, sweeteners and wetting agents. Pharmaceutically acceptable substances used in effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, include organic acids and a source of carbon dioxide. Coloring and flavoring agents are used in all of the above dosage forms.
Solvents include glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol and syrup. Examples of preservatives include glycerin, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic acid, sodium benzoate and alcohol. Examples of non-aqueous liquids utilized in emulsions include mineral oil and cottonseed oil. Examples of emulsifying agents include gelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate. Suspending agents include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum and acacia. Sweetening agents include sucrose, syrups, glycerin and artificial sweetening agents such as saccharin. Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene lauryi ether. Organic acids include citric and tartaric acid. Sources of carbon dioxide include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate. Coloring agents include any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, and mixtures thereof. Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants such fruits, and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant taste sensation.
For a solid dosage form, the solution or suspension, in for example propylene carbonate, vegetable oils or triglycerides, is in one embodiment encapsulated in a gelatin capsule. For a liquid dosage form, the solution, e.g., for example, in a polyethylene glycol, may be diluted with a sufficient quantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e.g., water, to be easily measured for administration. Alternatively, liquid or semi-solid oral formulations may be prepared by dissolving or dispersing the active compound or salt in vegetable oils, glycols, triglycerides, propylene glycol esters (e.g., propylene carbonate) and other such carriers, and encapsulating these solutions or suspensions in hard or soft gelatin capsule shells. Briefly, such formulations include, but are not limited to, those containing a compound provided herein, a dialkylated mono- or poly-alkylene glycol, including, but not limited to, 1 ,2-dimethoxymethane, diglyme, triglyme, tetraglyme, polyethylene glycol-350-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-550-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-750-dimethyl ether wherein 350, 550 and 750 refer to the approximate average molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol, and one or more antioxidants, such as butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), propyl gallate, vitamin E, hydroquinone, hydroxycoumarins, ethanolamine, lecithin, cephalin, ascorbic acid, malic acid, sorbitol, phosphoric acid, thiodipropionic acid and its esters, and dithiocarbamates.
Other formulations include, but are not limited to, aqueous alcoholic solutions including a pharmaceutically acceptable acetal. Alcohols used in these formulations are any pharmaceutically acceptable water-miscible solvents having one or more hydroxyl groups, including, but not limited to, propylene glycol and ethanol. Acetals include, but are not limited to, di(lower alkyl) acetals of lower alkyl aldehydes such as acetaldehyde diethyl acetal. 2. Injectables, solutions and emulsions
Parenteral administration, in one embodiment characterized by injection, either subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously is also contemplated herein. Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions. The injectables, solutions and emulsions also contain one or more excipients. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, glycerol or ethanol. In addition, if desired, the pharmaceutical compositions to be administered may also contain minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate and cyclodextrins.
Implantation of a slow-release or sustained-release system, such that a constant level of dosage is maintained is also contemplated herein. Briefly, a compound provided herein is dispersed in a solid inner matrix, e.g., polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene- vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hydrophilic polymers such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, cross-linked polyvinylalcohol and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, that is surrounded by an outer polymeric membrane, e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethyl siloxanes, neoprene rubber, chlorinated polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, vinylchloride copolymers with vinyl acetate, vinylidene chloride, ethylene and propylene, ionomer polyethylene terephthalate, butyl rubber epichlorohydrin rubbers, ethylene/vinyl alcohol copolymer, ethylene/vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol terpolymer, and ethylene/vinyloxyethanol copolymer, that is insoluble in body fluids. The compound diffuses through the outer polymeric membrane in a release rate controlling step. The percentage of active compound contained in such parenteral compositions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the activity of the compound and the needs of the subject.
Parenteral administration of the compositions includes intravenous, subcutaneous and intramuscular administrations. Preparations for parenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products, such as lyophilized powders, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions. The solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous.
If administered intravenously, suitable carriers include physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in parenteral preparations include aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable substances.
Examples of aqueous vehicles include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers
Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection, Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection. Nonaqueous parenteral vehicles include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil. Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations must be added to parenteral preparations packaged in multiple-dose containers which include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride. Isotonic agents include sodium chloride and dextrose. Buffers include phosphate and citrate.
Antioxidants include sodium bisulfate. Local anesthetics include procaine hydrochloride. Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcelluose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Emulsifying agents include Polysorbate 80 (TWEEN® 80). A sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions include EDTA. Pharmaceutical carriers also include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles; and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.
The concentration of the pharmaceutically active compound is adjusted so that an injection provides an effective amount to produce the desired pharmacological effect. The exact dose depends on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art.
The unit-dose parenteral preparations are packaged in an ampoule, a vial or a syringe with a needle. All preparations for parenteral administration must be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art.
Illustratively, intravenous or intraarterial infusion of a sterile aqueous solution containing an active compound is an effective mode of administration. Another embodiment is a sterile aqueous or oily solution or suspension containing an active material injected as necessary to produce the desired pharmacological effect.
Injectables are designed for local and systemic administration. In one embodiment, a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain a concentration of at least about 0.1 % w/w up to about 90% w/w or more, in certain embodiments more than 1% w/w of the active compound to the treated tissue(s). The compound may be suspended in micronized or other suitable form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble active product or to produce a prodrug. The form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the condition and may be empirically determined. 3. Lyophilized powders
Of interest herein are also lyophilized powders, which can be reconstituted for administration as solutions, emulsions and other mixtures. They may also be reconstituted and formulated as solids or gels.
The sterile, lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving a compound provided herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, in a suitable solvent. The solvent may contain an excipient which improves the stability or other pharmacological component of the powder or reconstituted solution, prepared from the powder. Excipients that may be used include, but are not limited to, dextrose, sorbital, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose or other suitable agent. The solvent may also contain a buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium phosphate or other such buffer known to those of skill in the art at, in one embodiment, about neutral pH. Subsequent sterile filtration of the solution followed by lyophilization under standard conditions known to those of skill in the art provides the desired formulation. In one embodiment, the resulting solution will be apportioned into vials for lyophilization. Each vial will contain a single dosage or multiple dosages of the compound. The lyophilized powder can be stored under appropriate conditions, such as at about 4 0C to room temperature.
Reconstitution of this lyophilized powder with water for injection provides a formulation for use in parenteral administration. For reconstitution, the lyophilized powder is added to sterile water or other suitable carrier. The precise amount depends upon the selected compound. Such amount can be empirically determined. 4. Topical administration
Topical mixtures are prepared as described for the local and systemic administration. The resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsions or the like and are formulated as creams, gels, ointments, emulsions, solutions, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, dermal patches or any other formulations suitable for topical administration. The compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof may be formulated as aerosols for topical application, such as by inhalation. These formulations for administration to the respiratory tract can be in the form of an aerosol or solution for a nebulizer, or as a microfine powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inert carrier such as lactose. In such a case, the particles of the formulation will, in one embodiment, have diameters of less than 50 microns, in one embodiment less than 10 microns.
The compounds may be formulated for local or topical application, such as for topical application to the skin and mucous membranes, such as in the eye, in the form of gels, creams, and lotions and for application to the eye or for intracisternal or intraspinal application. Topical administration is contemplated for transdermal delivery and also for administration to the eyes or mucosa, or for inhalation therapies. Nasal solutions of the active compound alone or in combination with other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients can also be administered.
These solutions, particularly those intended for ophthalmic use, may be formulated as 0.01% - 10% isotonic solutions, pH about 5-7, with appropriate salts. 5. Compositions for other routes of administration Other routes of administration, such as transdermal patches, including iontophoretic and electrophoretic devices, and rectal administration, are also contemplated herein. Transdermal patches, including iotophoretic and electrophoretic devices, are well known to those of skill in the art. For example, pharmaceutical dosage forms for rectal administration are rectal suppositories, capsules and tablets for systemic effect. Rectal suppositories are used herein mean solid bodies for insertion into the rectum which melt or soften at body temperature releasing one or more pharmacologically or therapeutically active ingredients. Pharmaceutically acceptable substances utilized in rectal suppositories are bases or vehicles and agents to raise the melting point. Examples of bases include cocoa butter (theobroma oil), glycerin-gelatin, carbowax (polyoxyethylene glycol) and appropriate mixtures of mono-, di- and triglycerides of fatty acids. Combinations of the various bases may be used. Agents to raise the melting point of suppositories include spermaceti and wax. Rectal suppositories may be prepared either by the compressed method or by molding. The weight of a rectal suppository, in one embodiment, is about 2 to 3 gm.
Tablets and capsules for rectal administration are manufactured using the same pharmaceutically acceptable substance and by the same methods as for formulations for oral administration. 6. Targeted Formulations
The compounds provided herein, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, may also be formulated to be targeted to a particular tissue, receptor, or other area of the body of the subject to be treated. Many such targeting methods are well known to those of skill in the art. All such targeting methods are contemplated herein for use in the instant compositions.
In one embodiment, liposomal suspensions, including tissue-targeted liposomes, such as tumor-targeted liposomes, may also be suitable as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These may be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art. Briefly, liposomes such as multilamellar vesicles (MLV's) may be formed by drying down egg phosphatidyl choline and brain phosphatidyl serine (7:3 molar ratio) on the inside of a flask. A solution of a compound provided herein in phosphate buffered saline lacking divalent cations (PBS) is added and the flask shaken until the lipid film is dispersed. The resulting vesicles are washed to remove unencapsulated compound, pelleted by centrifugation, and then resuspended in PBS. 7. Articles of manufacture
The compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives may be packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof provided herein, which is effective for modulating the activity of CDK-2, or for treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms of CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders, or diseases or disorders in which CDK-2 activity, is implicated, within the packaging material, and a label that indicates that the compound or composition, or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, is used for modulating the activity of CDK-2, or for treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms of CDK-2 mediated diseases or disorders, or diseases or disorders in which CDK-2 is implicated.
The articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials. Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are well known to those of skill in the art. Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment. A wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions provided herein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any disease or disorder in which CDK-2 is implicated as a mediator or contributor to the symptoms or cause.
EXAMPLES
Example 1 : Screening method
Fluorescence polarization assay The affinity of lead inhibitors binding to CDK-2 and CDK-2/cyclin A were determined by measuring a Ki value using a fluorescence polarization displacement assay. The deacetylated form of compound BMS-250595 was reacted with Alexa Fluor 647 to generate a compound (BMS-Alexa Fluor647) that bound to both proteins and provided a signal for fluorescence polarization displacement. Binding assays were performed in a 384 well Costar NBS coated plate. A total volume of 80 ml contained concentrations of CDK-2 or CDK-2/cyclin A at 2.2 mM and 0.22 mM, respectively. The concentration of BMS-Alexa Fluor647 was 50 nM. Serial dilutions of compounds were added to 12 wells. The final buffer concentration was 10 mM Hepes, pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCI, and 1 mM DTT. Samples were incubated at room temperature for 15 minutes and then read in an Analyst HT instrument using an excitation and emission wavelength of 580 and 680 nm, respectively. The displacement curves were analyzed by nonlinear regression fitting to determine Ki values using the equations and Excel curve fitting tool described by Zhang et al., 2004 (Zhang R., Mayhood T., Lipari P., Wang Y., Durkin D., Syto R., Gesell J., McNemar C, and Windsor W., Analytical Biochemistry 331 (2004) 138-146)
Example 2: Confirmation method
Isothermal Titration Calorimetry
Isothermal titration calorimetry (ITC) was used to obtain a full thermodynamic characterize of the binding affinity for several lead compounds. Human CDK-2 was dialyzed in to 10 mM Hepes, 150 mM NaCI, 10% glycerol, 1 mM DTT, pH 7.5 overnight with 2 changes of buffer. Both protein and ligand samples were prepared in 2 ml volumes. To prepare the ligand solution 20 ml of a 10 mM compound stock (in DMSO) was added to 2 ml of buffer. To match the DMSO concentration added to the ligand sample 20 ml of DMSO was also added to the 2 ml protein sample. The MicroCal MCS ITC (Northampton, MA) and included software were used for performing the titrations and analysis. The ITC runs were performed at 20 0C and mixed at a rate of 350 rpm. Injection volumes varied from 15 - 18 ml and 360 sec was recorded for each titration. When a clear baseline was not observed a blank titration was performed to subtract it from the raw data.
Example 3: Affinity comparison method
Temperature-dependent Circular Dichroism
Often in drug discovery it is important to be able to rank order the affinity of lead inhibitors. One such method is Temperature-dependent Circular Dichroism (TdCD). When using inhibitor concentrations - 10 - 20 mM one can rank order and estimate the affinity of nanomolar to micromolar leads. TdCD is a method that induces protein unfolding by increasing the temperature of the protein sample and the increase in unfolded species is detected by measuring changes in the ellipticity in the far-UV which detects changes in secondary structure. The midpoint temperature of unfolding for the unliganded protein is referred to as Tm. Addition of inhibitors to the protein sample will increase the Tm because compounds bound to the protein stabilize the native state. The higher the affinity of a compound the higher the apparent Tm due to the requirement of increased energy to dissociate higher affinity compounds. The theoretical description for estimating the affinity of ligands from Tm values has been described in detail by Brandts and Lin (1990) (Brandts, J. F. and Lin, L-N, Biochemistry 1990 29, 6927-6940). Three control compounds (BMS-250595, Purvalonal B, AG-12275) were analyzed by ITC and then characterized by the TdCD method. Using the Kd values obtained from ITC we were able to generate a standard curve relating Tm vs. Log([Lfree]/Kd) for each compound, where [Lfree] is the concentration of unbound ligand at the Tm temperature. This standard curve is used to determine the Kd of compounds after the Tm value is measured by TdCD. The routine use of the TdCD method provides a relatively rapid analysis for estimating the affinity of lead compounds binding to proteins.
A 6 cell peltier temperature controlled Jasco 810 spectropolarimeter was used to measure temperature-dependent protein unfolding profiles. A 0.1 cm path length cell was used and the protein concentrations were 0.2 mg/ml (6 mM). The buffer was 10 mM Hepes, 150 mM NaCI, 10 % glycerol, 1 mM DTT, pH 7.5. For TdCD measurements the wavelength was adjusted to 230 nm. A temperature rate of 1 °C/min was used and an integration of 4 sec per sample at each temperature was recorded (every 0.5 °C). A band width of 4 nm was used to improve the signal to noise.
Example 4: Synthesis:
General experimental notes
NMR spectra were acquired on a Mercurypιus 400 MHz NMR Spectrometer (Varian). LC-MS data was obtained using an Agilent 1100 Series LC/MSD (quadrupole, API-ES (Atmospheric Pressure Interface Electrospray)) with a capillary voltage set to 3500 V and running in positive mode.
Purification via reverse phase chromatography was accomplished using a C18 reverse phase column with a gradient of 0.1 % trifluoroacetic acid in water to 95:5 acetonitrile:water at a flow rate of 20 mL/min. Samples were collected using a UV (Gilson, 254 nm) or mass spectra (Agilent 1100 Series LC/MSD model SL) signal.
Normal phase silica gel chromatography on a Biotage instrument was accomplished using a Quad UV System (P/N 07052) utilizing KP-SIL 32-63 urn columns, 6OA with flash cartridges 12+M or 25+M. Commonly used abbreviations
ACN Acetonitrile
AcOH Acetic acid
(BoC)2O Di-ferf-butyl-dicarbonate
CuTC Copper(l) thiophene-2-carboxylate
DCC Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
DCU Dicyclohexylurea
DCM Dichloromethane
DIAD Diisopropylazodicarboxylate
DIEA Diisopropylethylamine
DMAP 4-Dimethylaminopyridine
DME Dimethoxyethane
DMF Dimethylformamide
DMFDMA N,N-Dimethylformamide dimethylacetal
DMSO Dimethyl sulfoxide
DPPF: 1 ,1 '-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene
EDCI (EDC) 1-(3-Dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride Et3N Triethylamine Et2O Diethyl ether
EtOAc Ethyl acetate
EtOH Ethanol HATU N,N,N\N'-Tetramethyl-O-(7-Azabenzotriazol-1 -yl)Uronium hexafluorophosphate Hex Hexanes
HOBt 1-Hydrozybenzotriazolθ
HPLC High pressure liquid chromatography
LiBH4 Lithium borohydride
LAH Lithium aluminum hydride mCPBA mefa-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid MeOH Methanol
NaH Sodium hydride
NaSMe Sodium methylsulfide Pd2(OAc) Palladium acetate Pd2(dba)3 Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0) PdCI2(dppf) [1 ,1'-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(ll), complex with DCM Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 Dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(ll)
PFP Pentafluorophenol
PMB p-methoxybenzyl
Pyr Pyridine
RT Room temperature
SiO2 Silica gel
TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
THF Tetrahydrofuran
TLC Thin layer chromatography
TMS Trimethylsilyl
Zn(CN)2 Zinc cyanide
Synthesis Example 1 :
Figure imgf000127_0001
Part A:
A mixture of 1-amino-2-propanol (1) (4.6 g, 61.8 rnrnol), benzyl chloroformate (11.5 g, 67.6 mmol), and sodium carbonate (7.16 g, 67.7 mmol) in water (50 mL) was stirred at 0 0C for 3 h. Water (50 mL) was added to the reaction mixture, the product was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 X 20 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by a flash chromatography on SiO2 eluting with 10:1 hex:EtOAc, followed by EtOAc to afford 1-benzyloxycarbonylamino-2- propanol (12.9 g, 100%) as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCI3): D 7.30 (m, 5H), 5.90 (s, 1H), 5.06 (s, 2H)1 3.95 (s, 1 H), 3.31 (m, 1 H), 3.04 (m, 1 H), 1.2 (d, 3H)
Part B:
To a solution of oxalyl chloride (37 mL, 2 M solution in CH2CI2, 74 mmol) in CH2CI2 (60 mL) at -78 0C under argon was added DMSO (7.8 g, 100 mmol). The mixture was stirred at -78 0C for 20 min, and to this mixture was added a solution of 1-benzyloxycarbonylamino-2-propanol (2) (12.9 g, 61.8 mmol) in CH2CI2 (40 mL). The mixture was stirred at -78 0C for 1 h, and then Et3N (21 mL) was added to the mixture. The mixture was warmed to room temperature and washed with 1 N hydrochloric acid followed by aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic solution was dried over Mg2SO4 and concentrated to afford 1- benzyloxycarbonylamino-2-propanone (10.2 g, 81%) as a solid, which was used without further purification in the next step. 1H NMR (CDCI3): D 7.32 (m, 5H), 5.50 (s, 1H), 5.06 (s, 2H), 4.07 (s, 2H), 2.1 (s, 3H) Part C:
A solution of i-benzyloxycarbonylamino-2-propanone (3) (8.6 g, 42 mmol) in ethanol (50 ml_) and 1 N hydrochloric acid solution (46 ml_) were stirred under hydrogen gas (1 atm) in the presence of Pd/C (1.5 g, 10%) at room temperature for 4 h. The mixture was filtered, and the filtrate solution was concentrated. The residue was triturated with Et2O to afford 1-amino-2-propanone (4.6 g, 100%) as a white solid of hydrochloride salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD): D3.92 (s, 2H),2.12 (s, 3H).
Part D:
A mixture of 3-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 ,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)~ propionic acid (500 mg, 1.25 mmol), HOBt (180 mg, 2.5 mmol), and EDCI (480 mg, 2.5 mmol) in DMF (3 ml_) was stirred at 0 0C for 0.5 h. To this mixture was added 1- amino-2-propanone hydrochloride (4) (272 mg, 2.5 mmol) followed by Et3N (550 DL, 0.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 0.5 h and at room temperature for 1 h. Water (10 ml_) was added, and the product was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 15 ml_). The combined extracts were dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated, and the residue was triturated with water to obtain 3-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 ,3-dihydro- isoindol-2-yl)-N-(2-oxo-propyl)-propionamide (5) as a solid (500 mg, 88%). 1H NMR (CDCI3): D7.78 (m, 2H), 7.70 (m, 2H), 7.35 (m, 4H), 7.1 (d, 2H), 6.8 (m, 3H), 4.92 (s, 2H), 4.2 (m, 2H), 3.6 (d, 2H), 2.2 (s, 3H); ). LCMS m/z 457.1 (M+1 )
Part E:
To a solution of 3-(4-Benzyloxy-phenyl)-2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 ,3-dihydro-isoindol-2- yl)-N-(2-oxo-propyi)-propionamide (5) (220 mg, 0.5 mmol) in acetic anhydride (2 mL) at room temperature was added concentrated sulfuric acid (0.2 mL). The mixture was stirred at 55-60 0C for 2 h, then sodium acetate (200 mg) was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. To the residue was added cold water (10 mL), the precipitated solid was collected, washed with water and dried, and the product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (20% ethyl acetate in DCM) to afford acetic acid 4-[2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 ,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)-2-(5-methyl-oxazol-2-yl)- ethyl]-phenyl ester (110 mg, 56%) as a light yellow solid; 1H NMR (CDCI3): D7.80 (m, 2H), 7.70 (m, 2H), 7.25 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 6.7 (s, 1 H), 5.7 (m, 1 H), 3.8 (m, 2H), 2.26 (s, 3H), 2.21 (s, 3H); LCMS m/z 391.1 (M+1 ).
Part F:
A mixture of acetic acid 4-[2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 ,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)-2-(5-methyl- oxazol-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl ester (6) (110 mg, 0.28 mmol) and hydrazine hydrate (56 mg, 1.12 mmol) in ethanol (5 mL) was refluxed for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath, a solid formed and was filtered off. The solid was washed with cold ethanol (2 mL) and the combined filtrate solutions were concentrated to give the crude product, which was used directly without further purification. LCMS m/z: 193.1 (M+1 ). Synthesis Example 2
Figure imgf000129_0001
1 2 3
Part A:
To a mixture containing [2-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-1-formyl-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (1) (250 mg, 0.70 mmol) and glyoxyl (220 mg, 40% 1.4 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) at 0 0C, was added a methanol solution containing 140 mg of NH3. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 2 hours and then left standing at room temperature overnight. After removal of solvent, the residue was purified by HPLC to give 80 mg of product. LCMS m/z 394.1 (M+1).
Part B:
To [2-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-imidazol-2-yl)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (2) (40 mg, 0.1 mmol) was added 9:1 TFA:H2O. After stirring at room temperature for 20 min, TFA was removed under vacuum. The crude product was used directly without further purification. LCMS m/z 293.2 (M+1).
Synthesis Example 3
Figure imgf000130_0001
1 2 3
Part A:
A mixture of [2-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-1-(1 H-imidazol-2-yl)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (1) (40 mg, 0.1 mmol) and Cs2CO3 in DMF was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was partitioned between EtOAc and water, the organic layer was separated, washed with water and dried over sodium sulfate. The product was purified using HPLC (30 mg, 72% yield). LCMS m/z 408.3 (M+1 ).
Part B:
To [2-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-1-(1-methyl-1 H-imidazol-2-yl)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (2) (30 mg, 0.1 mmol) was added 9:1 TFA: H2O. After stirring at room temperature for 20 min, TFA was removed under vacuum. The crude product was used directly without further purification. LCMS m/z 308.2 (M+ 1 ). Synthesis Example 4
Figure imgf000130_0002
Part A:
A mixture of [2-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-1-formyl-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (1) (250 mg, 0.7 mmol) and tosylmethyl isocyanide (152 mg, 0.77 mmol) in methanol (5 mL) was refluxed for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and was purified using prep- HPLC to give 110 mg product. LCMS m/z 395.2 (M+1). Part B:
To [2-(4-benzyloxy-phenyl)-1-oxazol-5-yl-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (2) (110 mg, 0.1 mmol) was added 9:1 TFA:H2O. After stirring at room temperature for 20 min, TFA was removed under vacuum. The crude product was used directly without further purification. LCMS m/z 295.10 (M+1). Synthesis Example 5
Figure imgf000131_0001
1 2 3
Part A: A solution of 3-(4-Benzyloxy-phenyl)-2-(1 ,3-dioxo-1 , 3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)- propionamide (1) (200 mg, 0.5 mmol) in N, N'-dimethylformamide acetal was heated at reflux for 1.5 h. After evaporating of the solvent, the residue was dissolved in acetic acid (5 ml_) and hydrazine hydrate (15 μl_) was added. The reaction was stirred at 90 0C for 1.5 h and left standing at room temperature overnight. After removal of acetic acid, the residue was purified using prep-HPLC to give 100 mg product. LCMS m/z 452.2 (M+1). Part B:
A mixture of 2 (100 mg, 0.2 mmol) and hydrazine hydrate (56 mg, 1.12 mmol) in ethanol (5 ml_) was refluxed for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath, a solid formed and was filtered off. The solid was washed with cold ethanol (2 ml_), the filtrate solutions were combined and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was used directly without further purification. LCMS m/z 295.2 (M+1 ).
Synthesis Example 6
Figure imgf000131_0002
Part A:
To an ice-cold mixture of lithium borohydride (170 mg, 7.8 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added dropwise MeOH (0.31 mL, 7.8 mmol), and a solution of 2- benzyloxycarbonylamino-3-(4-tert-butoxy-phenyl)-propionic acid methyl ester (1) (1.0 g, 2.6 mmol) in THF (8 ml_) over 10 min. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 6 min and at rt for 15 min, when analysis by TLC indicated complete consumption of starting material. The mixture was cooled to 0 0C, quenched by dropwise addition of glacial AcOH and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, brine, dried (over sodium sulfate) and concentrated to give 2 as an oil (0.87 g, 94%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.38-7.30 (m, 5H), 7.09-7.07 (d, 2H), 6.92-6.90 (d, 2H), 5.08 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1 H, NH), 3.94-3.91 (m, 1 H), 3.71-3.56 (m, 2H), 2.84-2.82 (d, 2H), 1.35 (s, 9H). Part B:
According to a modification of a literature procedure (Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 1998, 9, 3841-3854) a mixture of [1-(4-tert-butoxy-benzyl)-2-hydroxy-ethyl]-carbamic acid benzyl ester (2) (2.28 g, 6.37 mmol), iodomethane (3.96 ml_, 63.7 mmol) and silver(l) oxide (7.38 g, 31.8 mmol) in ACN (100 ml_) was stirred at rt for 4 days when analysis by TLC indicated complete consumption of starting material. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and concentrated to an oil which was chromatographed (SiO2, 5 % EtOAc/DCM) to afford 3 as a pale yellow oil (1.98 g, 84%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.38-7.30 (m, 5H), 7.09-7.07 (d, 2H), 6.92-6.90 (d, 2H), 5.08 (s, 2H), 5.05 (s, 1 H1 NH), 3.98-3.96 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.32-3.29 (m, 2H), 2.88-2.78 (d, 2H), 1.36 (s, 9H). HPLC-MS tR = 2.25 min (UV254 nm); mass calculated for formula C22H29NO4 371.21 , observed LCMS m/z 372.2 (M+H). Part C:
To a solution of [1-(4-tert-butoxy-benzyl)-2-methoxy-ethyl]-carbamic acid benzyl ester (3) (1.98 g, 5.33 mmol) in MeOH (80 mL) degassed and purged with argon, was added palladium (10 wt. % on activated carbon, 400 mg). The reaction mixture was degassed again, purged with hydrogen, and stirred at rt overnight under hydrogen atmosphere. The mixture was then filtered through Celite and concentrated to give 4 as an oil (1.17 g, 93%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 7.09- 7.07 (d, 2H), 6.93-6.91 (d, 2H), 3.39-3.36 (m, 1 H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.23-3.20 (m, 2H), 2.76-2.51 (d, 2H), 1.35 (s, 9H). HPLC-MS tR = 1.09 min (UV254 nm); mass calculated for formula C14H23NO2 237.17, observed LCMS m/z 238.3 (M+H). Synthesis Example 7
Figure imgf000133_0001
1 2 3
Part A:
A mixture of Boc-Tyr (Bzl)-aldehyde (1) (200 mg, 0.563 mmol), methoxylamine HCI (47 mg, 0.563 mmol) and anhydrous sodium acetate (230 mg, 2.81 mmol) in dry methanol (15ml_) was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated to give a white solid. Further purification by column chromatography (SiO2, 5% ethyl acetate/dichloromethane) afforded 2 as a white solid (110 mg, 51 %). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz):δ 7.45-7.3m, 5H), 7.14-7.07 (m, 2H), 6.93-6.89 (m, 2H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 3.91 (s, 1 H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 1.5 (s, 9H), 1.45 (s, 2H).
Part B:
A mixture of compound 2 (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) and TFA cocktail (1.5 ml_) (trifluoroacetic acid:water, 95:5) was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with acetonitrile/water (1 :1 , 3 ml_) and concentrated. The residue was diluted with acetonitrile (1 ml_) and 1 N HCI (1 ml_) and stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature and then concentrated to afford compound 3 as a HCI salt (85 mg, 94%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 400MHz): δ 7.5 (s, 1H), 7.51-7.36 m, 5H), 7.14-7.07 (m, 2H), 6.93-6.89 (m, 2H), 5.2 (s, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.12 (m, 1 H), 1.65 (s, 2H).
Synthesis Example 8
Figure imgf000134_0001
Figure imgf000134_0002
Part A:
To a round bottom flask equipped with Dean-Stark trap was added (1) (2 g, 7.4 mmol), phthalic anhydride (1.1 g, 7.4 mmol), triethylamine (0.1 mL) and toluene (50 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux and water produced was collected. After refluxing for 2 hours, the solvent was removed. The residue was acidified using 1 N HCI, filtered and washed with water, dried to give 2.2 g of (2). 1H NMR (DMSO-de, 400MHz): δ 7.8 (m, 4H), 7.3 (m, 5H), 7.1 (d, 2H), 6.8 (d, 2H), 5.05 (m, 1 H), 3.3 (m, 2H).
Part B:
To a solution of compound 2 (1 g, 2.49mmol) in DMF (20 mL) was added 1- hydroxybenzotriazole (0.34 g, 2.49 mmol). The resulting mixture was cooled to O0C and EDCHCI (0.95 g, 4.98 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was then stirred at O0C for 30 minutes, after which time a solution of ammonia in 1 ,4-dioxane (0.5M, 15 mL, 7.5 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture at O0C, and the resulting mixture stirred at O0C for 30 minutes and at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water, and the resulting organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give an oil. Further purification by column chromatography (SiO2, 2% methanol/dichloromethane) afforded compound 3 as a white solid (0.89 g, 90%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 400MHz): δ 7.8 (s, 5H), 7.68 (bs, 2H), 7.37-7.25 (m, 6H), 7.0 (d, 2H), 6.78 (d, 2H), 4.95 (s, 2H), 4.85 (dd, 1 H), 3.42-3.22 (m, 2H).
Part C: To a solution of compound 3 (200 mg, 0.49 mmol) in pyridine (4.8 ml_, 60.12 mmol) at O0C was added phosphorous oxychloride (70 μl_, 0.75 mmol) dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred for 4 h at O0C. The reaction mixture was acidified with 1N HCI (15 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (6x). The resulting organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give a beige solid. Further purification by column chromatography (SiO2, 5% ethyl acetate/dichloromethane) afforded compound 4 as a white solid (152 mg, 81%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz): δ 7.88-7.85m, 2H), 7.79-7.75 (m, 2H), 7.41-7.29 (m, 5H), 7.15 (d, 2H), 6.87 (d, 2H), 5.3 (m, 1H), 5.0 (s, 2H), 3.51-3.35 (m, 2H). Part D:
To a mixture of compound 4 (100 mg, 0.26 mmol), triethylamine HCI (215 mg, 1.56 mmol) and sodium azide (101 mg, 2.56 mmol) was added toluene (1 mL) and DMF (0.6 mL). The resulting mixture was heated overnight at 1200C. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a residue, which was purified by Prep-LC to afford compound 5 (72 mg, 65%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz):δ 7.85-7.80 (m, 2H), 7.78-7.73 (m, 2H), 7.38-7.27(m, 6H), 7.15 (d, 2H), 6.8 (d, 2H), 6.22 (dd, 1 H), 4.97 (s, 2H), 3.58- 3.39 (m, 2H). Part E: To a solution of compound 5 (100 mg, 0.24 mmol) in EtOH (1OmL) was added hydrazine monohydrate (46 μL, 0.94 mmol) and the resulting mixture was heated for 3 h at 600C, during which time a white precipitate formed. The reaction mixture was filtered, washed with EtOH and the filtrate was concentrated to a white solid, which was further purified by Prep-LC to afford compound 6 as a white solid (49 mg, 71 %). 1H NMR (DMSO-de, 400MHz): δ 8.5 (bs, 2H), 7.42-7.28 (m, 5H), 7.0 (d, 2H), 6.9 (d, 2H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 4.89 (t, 1 H), 3.22 (d, 2H). Synthesis Example 9
Figure imgf000136_0001
3 5
Part A:
Compound 1 was prepared following the procedures described in Synthesis Example 8, parts A-D. To compound 1 (294 mg, 0.69 mmol) in DMF (10 ml_) was added cesium carbonate (270 mg, 0.83 mmol) followed by methyl iodide (52μl_, 0.83 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was partitioned between DCM and water, and the resulting organic layer was washed with 0.1 N HCI, brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give a yellow oil. Further purification by Prep-LC afforded compound 2 as a white solid (44 mg, 29%) and compound 3 as a white solid (137 mg, 91 %). Compound 2:
1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz): δ 7.82-7.79 (μ, 2H), 7.73 -7.71 (μ, 2H), 7.36-7.34 m, 3H), 7.33-7.29 (m, 1 H), 7.1 (d, 2H), 6.83 (d, 2H), 5.75 (m 1 H), 4.97 (s, 2H), 3.88 (t, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H). Compound 3:
1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz): δ 7.79-7.76 (μ, 2H), 7.69-7.67 (μ, 2H), 7.39-7.28 (m, 4H), 7.17 (d, 2H), 6.82 (d, 2H), 5.59 (m, 1 H), 4.97 (s, 2H), 4.33 (s, 3H), 3.85-3.75 (m, 2H). Part B:
To a solution of compound 2 (44 mg, 0.1 mmol) in EtOH (5ml_) was added hydrazine monohydrate (19.4 μl_, 0.4 mmol) and the resulting mixture was heated for 3 h at 600C, during which time a white precipitate formed. The reaction mixture was filtered, washed with EtOH and the filtrate concentrated to a white solid which was further purified by Prep-LC to afford compound 4 as a white solid (22 mg, 71%). 1H NMR (DMSO-de, 400MHz): δ 8.73 (bs, 2H), 7.42-7.28 (m, 5H), 6.95-6.88 (m, 4H), 5.15 (s, 1 H), 3.59 (s, 3H), 3.12-3.05 (m, 1H).
Part C:
To a solution of compound 3 (137 mg, 0.31 mmol) in EtOH (12ml_) was added hydrazine monohydrate (60.5 μL, 1.25 mmol) and the resulting mixture was heated for 3 h at 600C, during which time a white precipitate formed. The reaction mixture was filtered, washed with EtOH and the filtrate concentrated to a white solid which was further purified by Prep-LC to afford compound 5 as a white solid (75 mg, 78%). 1H NMR (DMSO-de, 400MHz): δ 8.55 (bs, 2H), 7.42-7.28 (m, 5H), 7.13 (d, 2H), 6.88 (d, 2H), 5.04 (s, 2H), 4.95 (m, 1 H), 4.39 (s, 3H), 3.2 (m, 2H). Synthesis Example 10
Figure imgf000137_0001
1 2 3
Part A:
To Boc-Tyr (tBu)-OH (1) (300mg, 0.89 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (7ml_) was added N-methylamine (1.5 equivalents) and DIEA (463 μ\, 2.66 mmol). The reaction mixture was cooled to O0C and HATU (506 mg, 1.33 mmol) added to the reaction. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with 0.1 N NaOH, water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. Further purification by column chromatography (SiO2, 20% ethyl acetate/dichloromethane) afforded compound 2 as a white solid (215 mg, 69%). HPLC-MS tR = 1.85 min (5 min, UV254nm); mass calculated for formula C19H30N2O4 350.22, observed LCMS m/z 723.4 (2M+Na). Part B: A mixture of compound 2 (200 mg, 0.57 mmol) and TFA cocktail (3 mL)
(trifluoroacetic acid:water, 95:5) was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with acetonitrile/water (1 :1 , 6 mL) and concentrated. The residue was diluted with acetonitrile (2 ml_) and 1N HCI (2 ml_) and stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature, then concentrated to afford compound 3 as a HCI salt (126 mg, 96%). HPLC-MS tR = 0.4min (5 min, UV254nm); mass calculated for formula C10H14N2O2 194.11 , observed LCMS m/z 195.1 (M+1). Synthesis Example 11
Figure imgf000138_0001
Part A:
A mixture of 4-benzyloxybenzaldehyde (1) (0.5 g, 2.35 mmol) and ammonium acetate (0.18 g, 2.35 mmol) in nitroethane (4 mL) was refluxed overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a yellow solid, which was further purified by column chromatography (SiO2, dichloromethane) to afford compound 2 as a yellow solid (0.55 g, 87%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz):δ 8.07s, 1 H), 7.47-7.35 (m, 6H), 7.05 (d, 2H), 5.13 (s, 2H), 2.49 (s, 3H). Part B: To an ice-cold solution of LAH (1.63 mL, 1 M sol in THF, 1.63 mmol) was added dropwise a solution of compound 2 (200 mg, 0.74 mmol) in THF and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched by slowly adding water (3 mL) and then 15% NaOH solution (2mL), when a paste-like solid formed. The solids were filtered off and the layers were separated. The ethereal layer was acidified with 1 N HCI, the layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was made basic with 1 N NaOH solution and ice. The amine product was extracted into ether, dried ether over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give compound 3 as a white solid (145 mg, 81%). 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400MHz): δ 7.47-7.31 (μ, 5H), 7.10 (d, 2H), 6.92 (δ, 2H), 5.05 (s, 2H), 3.2 (m, 1 H), 2.61- 2.50 (m, 2H), 1.16 (d, 3H). Synthesis Example 12
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000139_0003
Figure imgf000139_0002
Part F
Figure imgf000139_0004
Part A:
To 5-lodoisatin (1) (10.0 g, 44.24 mmol) in hot 33% aqueous KOH (66 ml_) was added pyruvic acid (5.40 mL, 77.42 mmol). The very thick and heterogenous reaction mixture was heated to 40 0C and allowed to stand for 12 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with cold 33% aqueous KOH (100 mL). The potasssium salt was filtered off, washed with 33% aqueous KOH (50 mL) and cold ethanol (100 mL). The potassium salt was then dissolved in water (300 mL), acidified to pH 3 with cone. HCI which resulted in the formation of a precipitate. The white precipitate 2 was removed by filtration and dried under vacuum for 10 h to yield an off white solid (9.56 g, 73 %). 1H NMR (DMSO-de, 400MHz): δ 9.05 (d, 1H, J = 2.0 Hz), 8.51 (s, 1H), 8.16 (d, 1 H1 J = 9.0 Hz), 8.04 (dd, 1 H, J = 2.1 , 2.1 Hz).
Part B:
A mixture containing (2) (2 g, 5.84 mmol), potassium phosphate (6.2 g, 29.0 mmol), 2-thiopheneboronic acid (1.12 g, 8.8 mmol) and palladium acetate (128 mmg, 0.1 eq.) in water (50 mL) was purged with Ar and was heated to 500C for 2 hours. After cooling to RT, the mixture was filtered through celite, and the filtrated was acidified using 2N HCI. The formed solid was collected by filtration, washed with water and dried under vacuum. The crude product was used directly in the next step. Part C:
To a solution of compound 3 (5.0 g, 16.7 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) was added pentafluorophenol (9.22 g, 50.1 mmol) and then I .S-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (1.0M solution in dichloromethane) (50.1 mL, 50.1 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was suspended in 1 ,4-dioxane (150 mL) and then stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The precipitated solid was filtered off, and the filtrate was concentrated to yield an orange solid. Further purification by column chromatography (Siθ2, dichloromethane) afforded compound 4 as a yellow solid (6.6 g, 63%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz):δ 9.19 (d, 1 H, J = 1.8 Hz), 9.04 (s, 1 H), 8.45 (d. 1 H, J = 8.9 Hz), 8.26 (dd, 1 H, J = 1.0, 3.8 Hz), 7.65 (m, 1 H), 7.49 (dd, 1 H1 J = 3.7, 5.1 Hz), 7.2 (m, 1 H).
Part D:
To an ice-cold solution of compound 4 (100 mg, 0.16 mmol) in DCM (1 mL) was added L-tyrosine-(But)-OMe HCI (0.9 equivalents) as a THF solution (1 mL), followed by DIEA (1.1 equivalents) at O0C. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm up to rt, and was stirred at rt overnight. Compound 5 was used without further purification. HPLC-MS confirmed that compound 5 was the major product of the reaction. 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz):δ 9.12 (d, 1 H), 9.04 (s, 1 H), 8.58 (d. 1 H), 8.24 (m, 2H), 7.59 (dd, 1 H), 7.45 (dd, 1 H), 7.18 (m, 1 H), 7.12 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 5.15 (q, 1 H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.3 (d, 2H), 1.34 (s, 9H).
Part E:
Compound 6 was prepared by adding water (3 equivalents) to the crude reaction mixture of Part D, followed by DIEA (2 equivalents) at rt. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 4 hours. Compound 6 was confirmed as the major product of the reaction by HPLC-MS. The reaction mixture was concentrated. Further purification by Prep-LC afforded compound 6. HPLC-MS tR = 2.27 min (5 min, UV254nm); mass calculated for formula C29H28N2O6S 532.17, observed LC-MS 533.2 (M+H). Part F:
Compound 7 was prepared by adding a solution of ammonia in 1 ,4-dioxane (0.5M) (1.5 equivalents), followed by DIEA (2 equivalents) at rt, to the crude product 5 from Part D. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt overnight, concentrated and deprotected following a TFA protocol previously described. Further purification by Prep-LC afforded compound 7. HPLC-MS tR = 1.65 min (5 min, UV254nm); mass calculated for formula C25H21 N3O5S 475.12, observed LC-MS 476.0 (M+H). Synthesis Example 13
Figure imgf000141_0001
Part A:
To a solution of compound 1 (prepared following experimental procedures as described in Synthesis Example 12, part A) (5.0 g, 16.9 mmol) in DMF (5OmL) was added pentafluorophenol (9.22 g, 50.1 mmol) and then 1 ,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (1.0M solution in dichloromethane) (50.1 mL, 50.1 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was suspended in 1 ,4-dioxane (150 mL) and then stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The precipitated solid was filtered off, and the filtrate was concentrated to yield a solid. Further purification by column chromatography (SiO2, dichloromethane) afforded compound 2 as a yellow solid (6.6 g, 63%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz): δ 9.15 (d, 1H1), 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.34 (d. 1H), 8.06 (dd, 1H) Part B:
To an ice-cold solution of diPFP ester 2 (4.04 g, 6.44 mmol) in THF (70 mL) was added dropwise a solution of 2-amino-3-(4-tert-butoxy-phenyl)-propionic acid methyl ester (1.85 g, 6.44 mmol) in THF (10 ml_), followed by DIEA (2.25 mL.,12.9 mmol), and the resulting yellow mixture was stirred at O 0C for 4 h, and then at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a brown oil and chromatographed (SiO2, DCM to 10 % EtOAc/DCM) to give 3 (3.39 g, 76%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 9.09-9.08 (d, 1 H), 9.06 (s, 1 H), 8.53-8.51 (d, 1 H), 8.10-8.08 (d, 1 H), 7.98-7.95 (d of d, 1 H), 7.11-7.09 (d, 2H), 6.94-6.91 (d, 2H), 5.14-5.08 (m, 1 H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.29-3.27 (d, 2H), 1.34 (s, 9H). Part C: To a solution of monoPFP ester 3 (3.39 g, 4.87 mmol) in THF (70 ml_) was added dropwise p-methoxybenzyl alcohol (PMB-OH) (1.22 ml_, 9.78 mmol), followed by DIEA (1.7 ml_, 9.78 mmol), and the resulting mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a brown oil and chromatographed (SiO2, DCM to 2 % EtOAc/DCM) to give 4 (1.9 g, 60%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 9.10- 9.09 (d, 1 H), 8.74 (s, 1 H), 8.50-8.48 (d, 1 H), 8.00-7.98 (d, 1 H), 7.88-7.86 (d of d, 1 H), 7.45-7.42 (d, 2H), 7.09-7.07 (d, 2H), 6.95-6.89 (m, 4H), 5.42 (s, 2H), 5.09-5.03 (m, 1 H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 3.74 (s, 3H), 3.26-3.24 (d, 2H), 1.32 (s, 9H). Part D:
To a mixture of PMB ester 4 (19.3 mg, 0.03 mmol), PdCI2(dppf) (3 mg, 0.003 mmol), potassium phosphate (19 mg, 0.09 mmol) and 3-trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid (11.4 mg, 0.06 mmol) purged with argon, was added 1 ,4-dioxane (1 ml_) and the resulting mixture was heated at 80 0C overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and filtered through Celite to give crude Suzuki coupled product 5, which was used without further purification in the next step. Part E: Compound 5 was treated with 95:5 TFA:H2O (1.5 ml_) and stirred at rt for 2 h when analysis by LCMS showed product formation. The reaction mixture was quenched by the addition of 1:1 ACN:H2O, concentrated and purified by reverse- phase prepLC (Gilson) to afford 6 as a white solid (after lyophilization). HPLC-MS tR = 1.96 min (5 min; UV254 nm); mass calculated for formula C28H21F3N2O6 538.14, observed LCMS m/z 539.2 (M+H). Synthesis Example 14
Figure imgf000143_0001
Part A:
To a mixture of PMB ester 1 (45 mg, 0.064 mmol), PdCI2(dppf) (5 mg, 0.006 mmol), potassium phosphate (41 mg, 0.192 mmol) and trans-2-(4- fluorophenyl)vinylboronic acid (10.6 mg, 0.064 mmol) purged with argon, was added 1 ,4-dioxane (4 ml_) and the resulting mixture was heated at 80 0C overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc, filtered through Celite and concentrated to give a residue which was chromatographed (SiO2, 5 % EtOAc/DCM) to give 2 as a fluorescent oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 8.84-8.83 (d, 1 H), 8.72 (s, 1 H), 8.57- 8.55 (d, 1 H), 8.11-8.02 (m, 2H), 7.57-7.54 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.46 (d, 2H), 7.30-7.23 (m, 2H), 7.13-7.09 (m, 4H), 6.96-6.91 (m, 4H), 5.45 (s, 2H), 5.11-5.06 (m, 1 H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 3.74 (s, 3H), 3.27-3.25 (d, 2H), 1.33 (s, 9H).
Part B:
Compound 3 was prepared following a TFA deprotection procedure described in Synthesis Example 13, Part E. HPLC-MS tR = 1.93 min (5 min; UV2S4 nm); mass calculated for formula C29H23FN2O6 514.15, observed LCMS m/z 515.2 (M+H).
Part C:
To a solution compound 2 (30 mg) in THF (5 mL) degassed and purged with argon, was added palladium (10 wt. % on activated carbon, 6 mg). The reaction mixture was degassed again, purged with hydrogen, and stirred at rt overnight under hydrogen atmosphere, when analysis TLC indicated complete consumption of starting material. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and filtered through Celite to give crude product 4, which was used without further purification in the next step. Part D:
Compound 5 was prepared following a TFA deprotection procedure described in Synthesis Example 13, Part E. HPLC-MS tR = 5.25 min (10 min; UV254 nm); mass calculated for formula C29H25FN2O6 516.17, observed LCMS m/z 517.2 (M+H). Synthesis Example 15
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000144_0002
Part A:
To 5-methylisatin (1) (5 g, 31.02 mmol) in hot 33% aqueous KOH (40 mL) was added pyruvic acid (3.77 mL, 54.28 mmol). The very thick and heterogenous reaction mixture was heated to 40 0C and allowed to stand for 12 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with cold 33% aqueous KOH (50 mL). The potasssium salt was filtered off, washed with 33% aqueous KOH (30 mL) and cold ethanol (50 mL). The potassium salt was then dissolved in water (150 mL), acidified to pH 3 with cone. HCI that resulted in the formation of a precipitate. The pale brown precipitate was removed by filtration and dried under vacuum for 10 h to yield compound 2 as a beige solid (7.2 g, 100%). 1H NMR (DMSO- Cl6, 400MHz): δ 8.53 (s, 1 H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 8.12 (d, 1 H), 7.75 (dd, 1 H), 2.57 (s, 3H). Part B:
To an ice-cold solution of compound 2 (7 g, 30.3 mmol) in methanol (170 mL) was added thionyl chloride (20 mL) dropwise. The reaction was heated overnight at reflux. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a residue, which was purified by column chromatography (Siθ2, 5% ethyl acetate/DCM) to afford compound 3 as a yellow solid (5.7 g, 73%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz): δ 8.63 (σ, IH), 8.59 (σ, IH), 8.25 (δ, IH), 7.68 (δ, IH), 4.1(σ, 3H), 4.06s, 3H), 2.62 (s, 3H). Part C:
To a solution of compound 3 (250 mg, 0.96 mmol) in carbon tetrachloride (25 ml_) was added N-bromosuccinnimide (189 mg, 1.06 mmol). The reaction flask was evacuated twice and back-filled with argon. Benzoyl peroxide (23.2 mg, 0.096 mmol) was added to the reaction, the reaction flask was evacuated and back-filled with argon. The resulting mixture was heated overnight at reflux under an argon atmosphere. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and filtered. The filtrate was diluted with DCM and washed with water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give compound 4 as a yellow solid (262 mg, 81%). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 400MHz): δ 8.9 (δ, IH), 8.61 (s, 1 H), 8.35 (d, 1H), 7.88 (dd, 1 H), 4.71 (s, 2H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 4.09 (s, 3H).
Part D:
To a solution of phenol (36.4 mg, 0.38 mmol) in DMF (2 ml_) was added cesium carbonate (126 mg, 0.38 mmol), the resulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 10 min, followed by the addition of compound 4 (87 mg, 0.26 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, and the filtrate was concentrated to give an oil. Further purification by Prep-LC afforded compound 5 as an orange oil (30.5 mg, 38%). HPLC-MS tR = 2.01 min (5 min, UV254nm); mass calculated for formula C20H17NO5 351.11 , observed LCMS m/z 352.0 (M+1).
Part E:
To a solution of compound 5 (34.5 mg, 0.098 mmol) in THF (4 mL) and water (1 mL) was added 1 M LiOH (0.49mL, 0.49mmol) and the resulting reaction mixture stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc, acidified to pH 2 with 1N HCI, and the two phases were separated. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to afford compound 6 as a pale yellow solid (29 mg, 92%). HPLC-MS tR = 1.36 min (5 min, UV254nm); mass calculated for formula C18N13NO5 323.08, observed LCMS m/z 324.0 (M+1 ). Synthesis Example 16
Figure imgf000146_0001
Part A
Dimethyl acetylenedicarboxylate (2.84 g, 20 mmol) was added to the solution of 4-iodoaniline (4.38 g, 20 mmol) in MeOH (20 ml_) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours, followed by removal of MeOH under reduced pressure which gave an oil. The oil was dissolved in diphenyl ether and heated to 260 0C and stirred for one hour. Then the mixture was cooled to room temperature and the solid was collected by filtration and washed with diphenyl ether to give product 1 (5.8 g). LC-MS m/z 330.1 (M + H). Part B
A mixture of methyl ester 1 (3.3 g, 10 mmol) and 1N NaOH (30 mL) in MeOH (60 mL) was heated to 50 0C and stirred overnight under argon. Then MeOH was removed, the aqueous phase was diluted water (10 mL), and 3N HCI was added to adjust the pH value to 4-5. The formed precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with cold water. After drying under reduced pressure, product 2 was obtained as a yellowish solid (3.08 g). LC-MS m/z 316.1 (M + H).
Part C A mixture of 6-iodo-4-hydroxyquinoline-2-carboxylic acid (1.6 g, 5 mmol), 3- trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid (1.4 g, 7.5 mmol), K3PO4 (4.25 g, 20 mmol), and Pd(OAc)2 (56 mg, 0.25 mmol) in 30 ml_ of degassed H2O was heated under argon at 80 0C for 2 h. After cooling to room temperature, the solid was collected by filtration, washed with cold H2O and acetone. It was then treated with 20 ml_ of 1M HCI, the resulting yellowish solid was filtered again and washed with cold H2O. Drying in vacuo over P2O5 yielded 1.25 g (75%) of product 3 as a yellowish solid. LC-MS m/z 334.1 (M + H). Part D A solution of 6-(3-trifluoromethyl)phenyl-4-hydroxyquinoline-2-carboxylic acid
(1.15 g, 3.45 mol) in 20 mL of phosphorus oxychloride was refluxed for 3h and then cooled to room temperature. The solution was concentrated to dryness under vacuum to yield a black solid, which was used directly in the next step without further purification. Part E
4 was then dissolved in 20 mL of DCM and cooled to O0C.
Diisopropylethylamine (1.50 g, 11.5 mmol) was slowly added to the solution at O0C followed by the addition of /•-Bu-tyrosine amine (1.1 g, 3.8 mmol). The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 12 h. After removing the solvent by rotary evaporation, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate, washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3, 1 N HCI and brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (DCM/hexane to DCM) to give product 5 (1.92 g, 94%). LC-MS m/z 585.1 (M + H). Part F
To a solution of methanesulfonamide (14 mg, 0.15 mmol) in dry DMSO (1 mL), NaH (6.0 mg, 0.15 mmol) was added at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min and then heated to 40 0C for another 10 min. The 4-chloroquinoline starting material 4 (30 mg, 0.05 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated and stirred at 80 0C overnight. After cooling, the mixture was purified by reverse-phase prepLC (Gilson) and gave product 6 as a yellowish solid (21 mg). LC-MS m/z 644.2 (M + H). Part G
Compound 6 (12 mg) was dissolved in DCM (0.5 mL) and TFA (0.5 ml_) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The solvent was removed by reduced pressure and the residue was purified by Prep-LC to give product 7. LC-MS m/z 588.1 (M + H). Synthesis Example 17
Figure imgf000148_0001
Figure imgf000148_0002
Part A
Compound 1 was converted into the corresponding 4-CI quinoline acetyl chloride following a procedure described in Synthesis Example 16, Part D. The resulting acetyl chloride (1.0 mmol) was then dissolved in 10 mL of DCM. Diisopropylethylamine (0.73 g, 5.6 mmol) was slowly added into the solution at 0 0C followed by the addition of MeOH (0.2 mL). The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 12 h. After removing the solvent by rotary evaporation, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate, washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3, 1 N HCI and brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (DCM/hexane to DCM) to give product 2 (303 mg, 83%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8.47(s, 1 H), 8.44 (d, 1 H), 8.34(s, 1 H), 8.12 (dd, 1 H), 7.98 (s, 1 H), 7.94 (d, 1 H), 7.69(m, 2H), 4.12 (s, 3H). LC- MS m/z 366.0 (M + H). Part B
A solution of 4-chloroquinoline compound 2 (36.5 mg, 0.1 mmol) in DMA (2.0 mL) under argon was added to a flask which was charged with Pd2(dba)3 (10 mg, 0.01 mmol), DPPF (11 mg, 0.02 mmol), and Zn(CN)2 (24 mg, 0.2 mmol). The mixture was thoroughly degassed by alternately connecting the flask to vacuum and argon. The resulting solution was heated to 120 0C and stirred overnight, and diluted with EtOAc after cooling to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with H2O, brine and dried over Na2SO4. After concentration the residue was purified by column chromatography (95:5 DCM:EtOAc) to give product 3 as a yellowish solid (27 mg, 77%). LC-MS m/z 357.1 (M + H). Part C
A mixture of methyl ester 3 (51 mg, 0.14 mmol) and 1 N NaOH (2 mL) in MeOH (5 mL) was stirred overnight under argon. Then MeOH was removed, the aqueous phase was diluted with water (2 mL), and 1 N HCI was added to adjust the pH value to 4-5. The formed precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with cold water. After drying under reduced pressure, product 4 was obtained as a yellowish solid (31 mg, 65%). LC-MS m/z 343.1 (M + H). Part D
Acid 4 (46 mg. 0.13 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (5 mL) and HOBt (27 mg, 0.2 mmol), and EDC (38 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 min, then 4-(2-amino-3-methoxy-propyl)-phenol (36 mg, 0.2 mmol) and DIEA (100 uL) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt overnight and worked as previously described. The crude product 5 was purified by Prep-LC. LC-MS m/z 506.1 (M + H). Part E The 4-cyanoquinoline (5) (10 mg, 0.02 mmol) was dissolved in the mixture of
DMF (3 mL) and toluene (5 mL). A mixture of NaN3 (7 mg, 0.1 mmol) and Et3N HCI salt (14 mg, 0.1 mmol) was added to the mixture and the resulting mixture was heated to 120 0C and stirred overnight. Then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by Prep-LC to give product 6. LC-MS m/z 549.1 (M +H). Synthesis Example 18
Figure imgf000150_0001
Part A
Under argon 4-chloroquinoline 1 (36.5 mg, 0.1 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (1 ml_), and NaSMe (14 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated to 60 0C and stirred overnight. Then 1N NaOH (0.3 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 3 hours at 60 0C. The solvent was removed by concentration and the aqueous phase was adjusted to pH ~ 5 using 1 N HCI. The precipitate was collected by filtration and dried under vacuum overnight to give yellowish product 2. LC-MS m/z 364.1 (M + H). Part B
Compound 3 was prepared following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 17, Part D. Crude product 3 was then purified by column chromatography. LC-MS m/z 528.1 (M + H). Part C The starting material 3 (30 mg, 0.057 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (10 mL) and m-CPBA (40 mg, 0.23 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours and the diluted by EtOAc (20 mL). The organic phase was washed with NaHCO3, H2O and brine. After drying over Na2SO4, the solvent was removed by concentration and the residue was purified by Prep-LC to give pure product 4. LC-MS m/z 559.2 (M + H). Synthesis Example 19
Figure imgf000150_0002
Part A Compound 2 was prepared following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 16.
The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (DCM/hexane to DCM) to give product 2 (1.55 g, 86%). LC-MS m/z 571.2 (M + H).
Part B
The 4-chloroquinoline 2 (10 mg) was added to a mixture of Na2SO3 (100 mg) in dioxane (4 ml_) and H2O (8 ml_). The resulting mixture was heated to 100 0C and stirred for 1 day. The mixture was diluted by EtOAc and washed with 1 N HCI, H2O and brine. The crude product 3 was purified by Prep-LC. LC-MS m/z 561.0 (M + H). Synthesis Example 20
Figure imgf000151_0001
Part A
To the solution of starting material 1 (2.87 g, 10 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) was added Et3N (1.01 g, 11 mmol) followed by (Boc)2O (2.4 g, 11 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, then diluted with EtOAc and washed with H2O and brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to give crude product 2 (3.5 g), which was used without further purification in the next step. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 7.03 (d, 2H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 4.95 (d, 1 H), 4.56 (m,1 H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.06 (m, 2H), 1.43 (s, 9H), 1.34 (s, 9H). Part B
The ester 2 (10 mmol) was dissolved in THF (20 ml_) and was added slowly to a mixture of LiBH4 (653 mg, 30 mmol) and MeOH (1.215 mL, 30 mmol) at 0 0C (over 10 min). The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 20 min, then acetic acid (2 mL) was added to quench the reaction. The mixture was diluted by EtOAc (300 mL) and washed with H2O, brine, and dried over Na2SO4. After concentration, crude product 3 was obtained pure enough for the next step. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 7.08 (d, 2H), 6.93 (d, 2H), 4.71 (d, 1H), 4.24 (m, 1 H), 4.11 (dd, 1H), 4.08 (m, 1H), 2.85 (m, 2H), 1.44 (s, 9H), 1.34 (s, 9H). Part C
At 0 0C MsCI (387 uL, 5.0 mmol) was added to a mixture of alcohol 3 (646 mg, 2.0 mmol) and Et3N (835 uL, 6.0 mmol) in DCM (15 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 30 min and H2O was added to quench the reaction. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and the organic phase was washed with H2O and brine. After concentration, the residue was purified by column chromatography (95:5 DCM:EtOAc) to give product 4 as white solid (560 mg, 70%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 7.08 (d, 2H), 6.93 (d, 2H), 4.71 (d, 1 H), 4.24 (m, 1 H), 4.10 (m, 2H), 3.04 (s, 3H), 2.85 (m, 2H), 1.44 (s, 9H), 1.34 (s, 9H).
Part D To a solution of compound 4 (200 mg, 0.5 mmol) in DMF (5 mL), potassium phthalimide (925 mg, 5.0 mmol) was added. The resulting mixture was heated to 80 0C and stirred for 5 hours. Then EtOAc (100 mL) was added to dilute the mixture and the organic phase was washed with H2O and brine. After purification by column chromatography, the product 5 (185 mg, 82%) was obtained as an oil. LC-MS m/z 453.2 (M + H). Part E
Compound 5 (185 mg, 0.41 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (5 mL) and TFA (5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and concentrated to give the crude product 6 which was used in the next step directly. LC-MS m/z 297.2 (M + H). Part F Amine 6 (58 mg, 0.14 mmol) was added to a solution of diPFP ester 7 (98 mg, 0.14 mmol) in THF (10 ml_) followed by DIEA (50 uL, 0.28 mmol) at 0 0C. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. Then, DIEA (200 uL) and H2O (200 uL) were added and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 day. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (100 ml_), washed with 0.1 N HCI, H2O and brine. After concentration, crude product 8 was obtained and used in the next step directly. LC-MS m/z 632.1 (M + H).
Part G
The crude product 8 from Part F was dissolved in MeOH (5 mL), and hydrazine (0.1 mL) was added. The resulting mixture was heated to reflux and stirred for 3 hours. Then, the MeOH was removed by concentration and the residue was purified by Prep-LC to give product 9. LC-MS m/z 502.1 (M + H).
Synthesis Example 21
Part C
Figure imgf000153_0001
Part A
To a solution of starting material 1 (360 mg, 0.9 mmol) in DMF (10 mL), potassium cyanide (585 mg, 9.0 mmol) was added. The resulting mixture was heated to 80 0C and stirred overnight. Then EtOAc (100 mL) was added to dilute the mixture and the organic phase was washed with H2O, and brine. After purification by column chromatography, product 2 (281 mg, 94%) was obtained as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 7.08 (d, 2H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 4.75 (d, 1 H), 4.07 (m, 1 H), 2.94 (m, 1 H), 2.84 (m, 1 H), 2.70 (m, 1 H), 2.42 (m, 1 H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.36 (s, 9H).
Part B
To a solution of NaBH4 (38 mg, 1.0 mmol) in MeOH (3 mL) was added CoCI2 (2 mg, cat). Then starting material 2 (166 mg, 0.5 mmol) in MeOH (1 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Ethyl acetate (20 mL) was added to dilute the mixture and the organic phase was washed with H2O, brine. The EtOAc layer was dried and concentrated to give crude product 3 which was used in the next step directly. LC-MS m/z 337.2 (M + H).
Part C
Compound was dissolved in toluene (15 mL) and phthalic anhydride (90 mg, 0.6 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated to reflux and stirred for 6 hours and then worked up as previously described. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (7:3 hexane:EtOAc) to give product 4 (169 mg, 72%). LC-MS m/z 467.2 (M + H).
Part D
Compound 5 was prepared following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 20, Part E. LC-MS m/z 311.1 (M + H).
Synthesis Example 22
Figure imgf000154_0001
Part A
To a round bottom flask which was charged with iodo compound 1 (34 mg, 0.05 mmol), Pd(PPh3)2CI2 (2.0 mg, 0.0025 mmol), and CuI (1.0 mg, 0.005 mmol) was added Et3N (1 mL) and DMF (1 mL). The mixture was thoroughly degassed by alternately connecting the flask to vacuum and argon and then heated to 50 0C and stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (20 mL) after cooling to room temperature and filtered through celite. After concentration, residue 2 was obtained and used in the next step without further purification. LC-MS m/z 658.3 (M + H).
Part B The crude product from Part A was dissolved in DCM (4 ml_) and TFA (2 ml_) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and the solvent was removed by concentration. The residue was purified by Prep-LC to give the pure compound 3. LC-MS m/z 482.1 (M + H).
Part C
Under H2 (1 atm) the crude acetylene compound 3 (15 mg) was reduced in the presence of 10 % Pd/C (5 mg) in methanol at room temperature overnight. The mixture was filtered through celite to remove the catalyst and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. PrepLC gave the two pure products with single and double bond at 6-position. Compound 4: LC-MS m/z 486.1 (M + H). Compound 5: LC-MS m/z 484.1 (M + H).
Synthesis Example 23
Figure imgf000155_0001
Part A
Compound 2 was prepared following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 22, Part A. LC-MS m/z 625.3 (M + H).
Part B
At 0 0C, MsCI (39 uL, 0.5 mmol) was added to a mixture of alcohol 1 (32 mg, 0.05 mmol) and Et3N (84 uL, 0.6 mmol) in DCM (5 mL). The resulting mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour and then H2O was added to quench the reaction. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (10 ml_) and the organic phase was washed with H2O and brine. After concentration, the crude product 3 was used in the next step directly. LC-MS m/z 703.3 (M + H).
Part C
Starting material 3 was dissolved in DMF (2 mL). Then CS2CO3 (163 mg, 0.5 mmol) was added, followed by imidazole (34 mg, 0.5 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight and then worked up as previously described. The crude product 4 was purified by HPLC. LC-MS m/z 555.2 (M+ - PMB + H).
Part D
Compound 4 was dissolved in the DCM (1 mL) and TFA (1 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours and the solvent was removed by concentration. The residue was purified by Prep-LC to give product 5. LC-MS m/z 499.2 (M + H).
Synthesis Example 24
Figure imgf000156_0001
Part A Compound 1 was prepared following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 20. Compound 1 (486 mg, 1.0 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (20 mL) and 5% Pd/C (100 mg) was added under argon. The flask was purged with H2 several times and stirred under H2 for 2 days at room temperature. The mixture was filtered through celite and concentrated to give the crude product 2 which was used in the next step directly. LC-MS m/z 353.2 (M + H).
Part B
Compound 4 was prepared following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 17. LC-MS m/z 348.0 (M + H). Part C
To a round bottom flask which was charged with the iodo compound 4 (348 mg, 1.0 mmol), Pd(PPh3)2CI2 (70 mg, 0.1 mmol), and CuI (138 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added Et^N (2 mL) and DMF (2 mL). The mixture was thoroughly degassed by alternately connecting the flask to vacuum and argon and then heated upto 800C and stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted by DCM (20 mL) after cooling to room temperature and filtered through celite. After concentration, the residue was purified by column chromatography (9:1 to 1 :1 DCMΕtOAc) to give the product 5 as yellowish solid (259 mg, 80%). LC-MS m/z 323.1 (M + H).
Part D To a solution of methanesulfonamide (274 mg, 2.0 mmol) in dry DMSO (1 mL), NaH (80 mg, 2.0 mmol) was added at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperatue for 30 min and then heated to 40 0C for 10 min. The 4-chloroquinoline 5 (97 mg, 0.3 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated and stirred at 80 0C overnight. After cooling, H2O (0.1 mL) was added to the mixture, and the mixture was stirred for another 30 min. Then the mixture was purified by Gilson and gave product 6 as a yellowish solid. LC-MS m/z 410.1 (M + H).
Part E
Compound 6 (15 mg, 0.0366 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (2 mL) and then HOBt (13.5 mg, 0.1 mmol) and EDC (19.1 mg, 0.1 mmol) were added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 min, then amine 2 (18 mg, 0.05 mmol) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight and diluted with EtOAc (20 mL). The organic layer was washed with H2O, brine and dried over Na2SO4. After concentration, residue 7 was obtained and used in the next step directly. LC-MS m/z 744.3 (M + H).
Part F
The crude starting material obtained in Part E (21 mg) was dissolved in DCM (2 ml_) and TFA (2 ml_) was added. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 h and then concentrated. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (5 ml_) and hydrazine (0.1 mL) was added. The mixture was refluxed for 2 hours and then the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified by Prep-LC to give the final product 8. LC-MS m/z 558.1 (M + H).
Synthesis Example 25
Figure imgf000158_0001
Part A:
To a solution of 1 (650 mg, 1 mmol) and triethylamine (400 mg, 4 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) at 0 0C, methanesulfonyl chloride (336 mg, 3 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at 0 0C for 1 hour. TLC showed the reaction complete. Dichloromethane and water were added, the organic layer was collected, washed with 0.1 N HCI and water. After drying over sodium sulfate, the solution was concentrated and the product was used directly in the next step reaction. Part B A solution containing 2 (30 mg, 0.04 mmol), pyrazole (8.2 mg, 0.12 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (50 mg, 0.15 mmol) in DMF was stirred at RT overnight. Ethyl acetate was then added, followed by water. The ethyl acetate layer was collected, washed with water (2 x 10 ml_) and dried over sodium sulfate. After evaporation of solvent, the residue was used directly in the next step.
Part C
To the residue obtained from Part B, 95:5 TFAiH2O (1 ml_) was added. After stirring at RT for 20 minutes, TFA was removed under vacuum and the product was purified using prep-HPLC to give 4. LCMS m/z 537.2 (M+ 1).
Synthesis Example 26
Figure imgf000159_0001
Part A:
A solution containing 1 (1g, 1.81 mmol), palladium tetrakistriphenylphosphine (207 mg, 0.18 mmol) and CuTc (1.5 g, 7.2 mmol) in dioxane (20 ml_) was degassed, stirred at 50 0C overnight under argon. The mixture was then filtered through celite and concentrated. The crude product was purified using flash chromatography (5 % methanol in DCM) to give 2 (0.9g, 88% yield). LCMS m/z 533.2 (M+1).
Part B: Compound 3 was prepared in 50% yield following experimental procedures described in Synthesis Example 25, Parts A and B. LCMS m/z 583.3 (M+1).
Part C:
To a solution of f-butylsulfonamide (0.25 g, 1.8 mmol) in DMSO (4 mL) was added sodium hydride (45 mg). The mixture was stirred at RT for 10 min, then at 50 0C for 10 minutes. To this reaction mixture was added 3 (100 mg, 0.17 mmol) and the resulting mixture was heated at 90 0C overnight. After cooling to RT, the reaction mixture was filtered and purified using prep-HPLC to give 4 (30 mg, 25% yield). LCMS m/z 684.3 (M+1). Part D:
The f-butyl group was removed using 95:5 TFAih^O (1 mL) following the procedure described in Synthesis Example 25, Part C . LCMS m/z 628.2 (M+1).
All references cited herein, whether in print, electronic, computer readable storage media or other form, are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety, including but not limited to, abstracts, articles, journals, publications, texts, treatises, internet web sites, databases, software packages, patents, and patent publications. A number of embodiments of the invention have been described. Nevertheless, it will be understood that various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. These modifications specifically include but are not limited to the addition of substituents to carbon or nitrogen atoms, or as otherwise appropriate, as envisioned by and described in the specification; the resulting molecules are within the spirit and scope of the invention. Accordingly, other embodiments are within the scope of the following claims and the Summary (above).

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A compound of the formula (I)
Figure imgf000161_0001
Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof, wherein:
R0 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl or heterocyclylalkyl; wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from Q0;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxyoxo, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, alkylheterocyclyl, carboxy, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, oxo, -CO2R5, -C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=(NOR5), where each of said R5 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; further wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from Q1;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, carboxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylsulfonamido, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, - CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -C(O)N(R6)2, or - C(O)NHC(R6)C(O)R6; where each of said R6 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; further wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from Q2;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, arylcycloalkyl, aryloxyaryl, aminoaryl, aminoalkylaryl, alkyloxa, alkylthia, cyanoalkynyl, cyanoaryl, cycloalkyl, haloaryl, haloalkylaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, hydroxyalkyl, thiaalkyl, heteroaryl, nitroaryl, oxaalkyl, oxaalkynyl-CO2R7, -N(R7)SO2R7, -C(O)NHSO2R7, - SO2R7, -C(O)N(R7)2; where each of said R7 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; further wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and are independently selected from Q3;
Q0 is alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy, -C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, or - NHS(O)2;
Q1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, - NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2;
Q2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkyloxo, alkylsulfonyl, aryl, arylsulfonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, haloaryl, hydroxysulfonyl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy, - C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2; and
Q3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylamido, alkyloxo, alkylsulfonyl, alkoxyoxo, alkylaryl, alkylheteroaryl, amino, aryloxy, aryl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonamido, halo, alkoxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylamino, aminoalkyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cyano, dialkylamino, dialkylaminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, haloaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxysulfonyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, hydroxyheterocyclyl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, oxo, nitro, -C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, or - NHS(O)2.
2. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R0 is -(CH2)nR4; where n = 1-3 and R4 is independently hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryl, dialkylamino, dihydroxyaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyaryl, haloaryl, or nitroaryl.
3. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R1 is -CO2R5, -(CH2)nOR5, - (CH2)nN(R5)2, -C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=NOR5; where n = 1-3 and each R5 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
4. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R2 is hydrogen, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -(C(O)N(R6)2), heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl; where each R6 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
5. The compound of claim 1 wherein R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkenyl, alkylalkenyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkynyl, alkylalkynyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, phenyl, aryl.alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryloxyaryl, oxaalkyl, alkyloxa, thiaalkyl, alkylthia heteroaryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylcycloalkyl, CH=CHR7, C≡CR7, C6H4CH2OR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4OR7, C6H4CH2SR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4SR7, heterocyclyl, alkoxy, OCH2R7, or CH2OR7; and where each R7 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
6. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is -(CH2)nR4; where n = 1-3 and R4 is independently hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryl, dialkylamino, dihydroxyaryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyaryl, haloaryl, or nitroaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, -(CH2)nOR5, -(CH2)nN(R5)2, -C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=NOR5; where n = 1-3 and R5 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino;
R2 is hydrogen, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -(C(O)N(R6)2), heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl; where R6 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino; and
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, alkenyl, alkylalkenyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkynyl, alkylalkynyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, phenyl, aryl, alkylaryl, alkoxyaryl, aryloxyaryl, oxaalkyl, alkyloxa, thiaalkyl, alkylthia heteroaryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, arylcycloalkyl, CH=CHR7, C ≡CR7, C6H4CH2OR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4OR7, C6H4CH2SR7, C6H4CH2R7, C6H4SR7, heterocyclyl, alkoxy, OCH2R7, or CH2OR7; and where R7 is each, independently, hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
7. The compound of claim 2, wherein R0 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyarylalkyl, dihydroxyarylalkyl, alkoxyarylalkyl, haloarylalkyl, or nitroarylalkyl.
8. The compound of claim 7, wherein R0 is:
Figure imgf000165_0001
where each R7 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro or halo; and n is
0, 1 or 2.
9. The compound of claim 8, wherein R0 is:
Figure imgf000165_0002
where each R 58 is hydrogen, or alkyl.
10. The compound of claim 8, wherein R0 is:
Figure imgf000165_0003
11. The compound of claim 10, wherein R <> : is„.:
Figure imgf000166_0001
12. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxyoxo, aminoalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, carboxy, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, oxo, -CO2R5, -C(O)N(R5)2, -CH2NHCH2CH2N(CHS)2, Or -C=NOR5, where R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
13. The compound of claim 12, wherein R1 is -CO2R5, -(CH2)nOR5, - (CH2)nN(R5)2, -C(O)N(R5)2, or -C=NOR5, where n = 1-3.
14. The compound of claim 13, wherein R1 is:
Figure imgf000166_0002
15. The compound of claim 12, wherein R1 is:
Figure imgf000166_0003
Figure imgf000167_0001
16. The compound of claim 12, wherein R1 is:
Figure imgf000167_0002
17. The compound of claim 12, wherein R1 is -C(O)OCH3.
18. The compound of claim 12, wherein R1 is -CH2OCH3.
19. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, carboxy, alkoxyoxo, alkylsulfonamido, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, - C(O)N(R6)2, or -C(O)NHC(R6)C(O)R6; where R6 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryi, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
20. The compound of claim 19, wherein R2 is hydrogen, -CO2R6, -N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, -C(O)N(R6)2> or -C(O)NHC(R6)C(O)R6; where R6 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryi, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, alkyloxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino.
21. The compound of claim 19, wherein R2 is:
Figure imgf000168_0001
22. The compound of claim 19, wherein R2 is:
Figure imgf000168_0002
Figure imgf000169_0001
23. The compound of claim 19, wherein R 2 is
Figure imgf000169_0002
24. The compound of claim 19, wherein R2 is
Figure imgf000169_0003
25. The compound of claim 19, wherein R2 is -COOH.
26. The compound of claim 19, wherein R2 is -NHS(O)2C(CH3)3.
27. The compound of claim 1 , wherein R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, arylcycloalkyl, aryloxyaryl, aminoaryl, aminoalkylaryl, alkyloxa, alkylthia, cyanoalkynyl, cyanoaryl, cycloalkyl, haloaryl, haloarylalkyl, haloarylalkenyl, haloalkylaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, hydroxys I kyl, hydroxyaryl, thiaalkyl, heteroaryl, nitroaryl, oxaalkyl, or oxaalkynyl -CO2R6, - N(R6)SO2R6, -C(O)NHSO2R6, -SO2R6, or -(C(O)N(R6)2), with R6 being hydrogen, alky!, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, oxo, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylheterocyclyl, or alkylamino, wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, cyanoalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or optionally independently substituted with one or more substituents, which can be the same or different and is independently selected from Q3.
28. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000170_0001
where n is 1 or 2 and Q1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, -NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2.
29. The compound of claims 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000170_0002
where n is 1 or 2; Q1 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxy, amino, halo, alkoxy, alkylamino, dialkylamino, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, alkylaryl, aryloxy, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, haloheteroaryl, alkylheteroaryl, hydroxyheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyloxy, alkylamido, oxo, alkylsulfonamido, alkyloxo, alkoxyoxo, nitro, cyano, haloalkoxy-C(O)NH, - NHC(O), -S(O)2NH, Or -NHS(O)2; and L is -CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-, -C≡C-, -CH2O-, or -OCH2-.
30. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000171_0001
Figure imgf000171_0002
31. The compound of claim 27, wherein R 3 is:
Figure imgf000171_0003
Figure imgf000172_0001
32. The compound of claim 27, wherein R 3 is:
Figure imgf000172_0002
where A is O or S.
33. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000172_0003
where X is halo.
34. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000173_0001
where X is halo or CF3 and A is O or S.
35. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000173_0002
36. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is
Figure imgf000174_0001
37. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000175_0001
38. The compound of claim 27, wherein R 3 is:
Figure imgf000176_0001
39. The compound of claim 27, wherein R 3 is:
Figure imgf000177_0001
40. The compound of claim 27, wherein R3 is:
41. The compound of claims 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is haloalkylaryl.
42. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is arylcycloalkyl.
43. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is haloalkoxyaryl.
44. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is alkyl.
45. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is haloarylalkyl.
46. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is haloarylalkenyl.
47. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl; R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is haloarylalkyl.
48. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is alkenyl.
49. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl; R2 is -CO2H; and R3 is alkynyl.
50. The compound of claim 1 , wherein: R0 is hydroxyaryl;
R1 is -CO2R5, where R5 is alkyl;
R2 is -CO2H; and
R3 is heteroarylalkylaryl.
51. The compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound is selected from:
Figure imgf000179_0001
Figure imgf000180_0001
Figure imgf000181_0001
Figure imgf000181_0002
Figure imgf000182_0001
Figure imgf000182_0002
Figure imgf000182_0003
Figure imgf000183_0001
183
Figure imgf000184_0001
Figure imgf000185_0001
ı85
Figure imgf000186_0001
Figure imgf000187_0001
Figure imgf000187_0002
Figure imgf000188_0001
Figure imgf000188_0002
Figure imgf000189_0001
Figure imgf000189_0002
Figure imgf000190_0001
Figure imgf000190_0002
Figure imgf000191_0001
Figure imgf000192_0001
Figure imgf000193_0001
ı93
Figure imgf000194_0001
Figure imgf000195_0001
Figure imgf000196_0001
Figure imgf000197_0001
Figure imgf000198_0001
52. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising a compound of claim 1 , and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
53. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 52 that is formulated for single dosage administration.
54. A compound of claim 1 used in the treatment of a CDK-2 mediated disease.
55. Use of a compound of claim 1 in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of a CDK-2 mediated disease.
56. The use of at least one compound of claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, ester or prodrug thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament to treat, prevent, or ameliorate one or more symptoms of a disease or disorder that is modulated or otherwise affected by CDK-2in a patient.
57. The use of claim 56, wherein the disease or disorder is selected from inflammatory disease, neurodegenerative disease, cancer and diabetes.
58. The use of claim 57, wherein the inflammatory disease is selected from acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, and adult respiratory distress syndrome.
59. The use of claim 58, wherein the neurodegenerative disease is selected from acute Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, cerebral ischemia, and other neurodegenerative diseases.
60. The use of claim 57, wherein the diabetes is selected from diabetes mellitus and diabetes insipidus.
61. The use of claim 60, wherein the diabetes is selected from type 1 diabetes and type 2 diabetes.
62. The use of claim 56, wherein said disease is selected from the group consisting of: cancer of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, small cell lung cancer, esophagus, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid, prostate, and skin, including squamous cell carcinoma; leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B- cell lymphoma, T- cell lymphoma, Hodgkins lymphoma, non-Hodgkins lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma and Burkett's lymphoma; acute and chronic myelogenous leukemia, myelodysplastic syndrome and promyelocyte leukemia; fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma; astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma and schwannomas; melanoma, seminoma, teratocarcinoma, osteosarcoma, xenoderoma pigmentosum, keratoctanthoma, thyroid follicular cancer and Kaposi's sarcoma.
63. The use of (i) an amount of a first compound, which is a compound of claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, ester or prodrug thereof, and (ii) an amount of at least one second compound, said second compound being an anti-cancer agent, for the manufacture of a medicament to treat one or more diseases associated with cyclin dependent kinase in a mammal, wherein the amounts of the first compound and said second compound result in a therapeutic effect.
64. The use of claim 63, further comprising radiation therapy.
65. The use of claim 63, wherein said anti-cancer agent is selected from the group consisting of a cytostatic agent, cisplatin, doxorubicin, taxotere, taxol, etoposide, irinotecan, camptostar, topotecan, paclitaxel, docetaxel, epothilones, tamoxifen, 5-fluorouracil, methoxtrexate, temozolomide, cyclophosphamide, SCH 66336, R115777, L.778,123, BMS 214662, Iressa, Tarceva, antibodies to EGFR, Gleevec, intron, ara-C, adriamycin, Cytoxan, gemcitabine, Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Ifosfamide, Melphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylenemelamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, Dacarbazine, Floxuridine, Cytarabine,
6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, oxaliplatin, leucovirin, ELOXATIN™, Pentostatine, Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Idarubicin, Mithramycin, Deoxycoformycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Teniposide 17α- Ethinylestradiol, Diethylstilbestrol, Testosterone, Prednisone, Fluoxymesterone, Dromostanolone propionate, Testolactone, Megestrolacetate, Methylprednisolone, Methyltestosterone, Prednisolone, Triamcinolone, Chlorotrianisene, Hydroxyprogesterone, Aminoglutethimide, Estramustine, Medroxyprogesteroneacetate, Leuprolide, Flutamide, Toremifene, goserelin, Cisplatin, Carboplatin, Hydroxyurea, Amsacrine, Procarbazine, Mitotane, Mitoxantrone, Levamisole, Navelbene, Anastrazole, Letrazole, Capecitabine, Reloxafine, Droloxafine, or Hexamethylmelamine..
66. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, ester or prodrug thereof, in combination with at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
67. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 66, additionally comprising one or more anti-cancer agents selected from the group consisting of cytostatic agent, cisplatin, doxorubicin, taxotere, taxol, etoposide, irinotecan, camptostar, topotecan, paclitaxel, docetaxel, epothilones, tamoxifen, 5-fluorouracil, methoxtrexate, temozolomide, cyclophosphamide, SCH 66336, R115777, L778,123, BMS 214662, Iressa, Tarceva, antibodies to EGFR, Gleevec, intron, ara-C, adriamycin, Cytoxan, gemcitabine, Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Ifosfamide, Melphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylenemelamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, Dacarbazine, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, 6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, Pentostatine, Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Idarubicin, Mithramycin, Deoxycoformycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Teniposide 17α- Ethinylestradiol, Diethylstil bestrol , Testosterone, Prednisone, Fluoxymesterone, Dromostanolone propionate, Testolactone, Megestrolacetate,
Methylprednisolone, Methyltestosterone, Prednisolone, Triamcinolone, Chlorotrianisene, Hydroxyprogesterone, Aminoglutethimide, Estramustine, Medroxyprogesteroneacetate, Leuprolide, Flutamide, Toremifene, goserelin, Cisplatin, Carboplatin, Hydroxyurea, Amsacrine, Procarbazine, Mitotane, Mitoxantrone, Levamisoie, Navelbene, Anastrazole, Letrazole, Capecitabine, Reloxafine, Droloxafine, or Hexamethylmelamine.
68. The use of the pharmaceutical composition of claim 66 for the manufacture of a medicament to inhibit one or more cyclin dependent kinases in a patient.
69. A compound of claim 1 in purified form.
PCT/US2006/031945 2005-08-17 2006-08-16 Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands WO2007022241A2 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002619706A CA2619706A1 (en) 2005-08-17 2006-08-16 Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands
EP06801601.3A EP1931657B1 (en) 2005-08-17 2006-08-16 Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands
MX2008002363A MX2008002363A (en) 2005-08-17 2006-08-16 Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands.
JP2008527091A JP4976394B2 (en) 2005-08-17 2006-08-16 A novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligand

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US70914205P 2005-08-17 2005-08-17
US60/709,142 2005-08-17

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007022241A2 true WO2007022241A2 (en) 2007-02-22
WO2007022241A3 WO2007022241A3 (en) 2007-09-27

Family

ID=37758330

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2006/031945 WO2007022241A2 (en) 2005-08-17 2006-08-16 Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands

Country Status (6)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1931657B1 (en)
JP (1) JP4976394B2 (en)
CN (1) CN101287727A (en)
CA (1) CA2619706A1 (en)
MX (1) MX2008002363A (en)
WO (1) WO2007022241A2 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008128647A1 (en) * 2007-04-23 2008-10-30 Sanofi-Aventis Quinoline-carboxamide derivatives as p2y12 antagonists
WO2008144464A1 (en) * 2007-05-18 2008-11-27 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Quinoline derivatives as p13 kinase inhibitors
WO2010059549A1 (en) * 2008-11-18 2010-05-27 Glaxosmithkline Llc Prolyl hydroxylase inhibitors
WO2010110689A1 (en) * 2009-03-23 2010-09-30 Andrzej Marciniak A novel medical use of kynurenic acid, its precursors and derivatives
WO2010129451A1 (en) * 2009-05-05 2010-11-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for preparing bromo-substituted quinolines
JP2011502141A (en) * 2007-10-29 2011-01-20 ナトコ ファーマ リミテッド 4- (Tetrazol-5-yl) -quinazoline derivatives as anticancer agents
EP2351743A1 (en) * 2008-10-27 2011-08-03 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Bicyclic compound
US9125937B2 (en) 2008-01-31 2015-09-08 Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale (Inserm) Labelled analogues of halobenzamides as multimodal radiopharmaceuticals and their precursors
EP3088397A1 (en) * 2007-04-11 2016-11-02 Canbas Co. Ltd. Compounds that abrogate the cell cycle g2 checkpoint for use in the treatment of cancer
US20230046427A1 (en) * 2020-06-22 2023-02-16 Pmv Pharmaceuticals, Inc. METHODS AND COMPOUNDS FOR RESTORING MUTANT p53 FUNCTION

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104961725B (en) * 2015-06-18 2017-04-19 浙江大学 4-alpha, beta-unsaturated carboxamidoquinoline compounds and preparation and application

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004080463A1 (en) 2003-03-10 2004-09-23 Schering Corporation Heterocyclic kinase inhibitors: methods of use and synthesis

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5346907A (en) * 1988-04-05 1994-09-13 Abbott Laboratories Amino acid analog CCK antagonists
JPH05310702A (en) * 1992-05-06 1993-11-22 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Anti-inflammatory agent, immunomodulating agent and quinoline-2,4-dicarboxylic acid diamide derivative
AR013079A1 (en) * 1997-05-06 2000-12-13 Smithkline Beecham Corp SUBSTITUTED DERIVATIVES OF TETRAHIDROFURANO-3-ONAS, TETRAHIDROPIRANO-3- ONAS AND TETRAHIDROTIOFEN-3-ONAS, A PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF A PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT USEFUL AS INTERMEDIATE PROTEIN INHIBITORS
WO1998050534A1 (en) * 1997-05-08 1998-11-12 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Protease inhibitors
US6376670B1 (en) * 1997-06-19 2002-04-23 Sepracor Inc. Quinoline-indole antimicrobial agents, uses and compositions related thereto
US6861424B2 (en) * 2001-06-06 2005-03-01 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Platelet adenosine diphosphate receptor antagonists
AU2003248921A1 (en) * 2002-07-09 2004-01-23 Point Therapeutics, Inc. Boroproline compound combination therapy
AU2003297763A1 (en) * 2002-12-11 2004-06-30 Schering Aktiengesellschaft 2-aminocarbonyl-quinoline compounds as platelet adenosine diphosphate receptor antagonists

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004080463A1 (en) 2003-03-10 2004-09-23 Schering Corporation Heterocyclic kinase inhibitors: methods of use and synthesis

Non-Patent Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design", 1987, AMERICAN PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION AND PERGAMON PRESS
A. L. BINGHAM ET AL., CHEM. COMMUN., 2001, pages 603 - 604
ANN. PHARMACOTHER, vol. 36, 2002, pages 905 - 911
BIOCHEM., vol. 11, 1972, pages 942 - 944
COHEN P., EUR. J. BIOCHEM., vol. 268, 2001, pages 5001 - 5010
COHEN P., NAT. REV. DRUG DISCOVERY, vol. 1, 2002, pages 309 - 315
E. C. VAN TONDER ET AL., AAPS PHARMSCITECH., 2004
KOSTICH M; ENGLISH J; MADISON V; GHEYAS F; WANG L; QIU P; GREENE J; LAZ TM., GENOME BIOL., vol. 3, no. 9, 2002
M. CAIRA ET AL., J. PHARMACEUTICAL SCI., vol. 93, no. 3, 2004, pages 601 - 611
MANNING G.; WHYTE D.B.; MARTINEZ R.; HUNTER T.; SUDARSANAM S., SCIENCE, vol. 298, 2002, pages 1912
MCCLUE S.; BLAKE D.; CLARKE R.; CUMMINGS L.; FISCHER P.; MACKENZIE M.; STEWART K.; WANG S.; ZHELEV N.; ZHELEVA D., INT. J. CANCER, vol. 102, no. 5, 2002, pages 463 - 468
MISRA R. ET AL., J.MED. CHEM., vol. 47, 2004, pages 1719 - 1728
T. HIGUCHI; V. STELLA: "Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems", vol. 14, 1987, A.C.S. SYMPOSIUM SERIES
T. HIGUCHI; W. STELLA: "Pro- drugs as Novel Delivery Systems", vol. 14, A.C.S. SYMPOSIUM SERIES
T. W. GREENE ET AL.: "Protective Groups in organic Synthesis", 1991, WILEY

Cited By (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3088397A1 (en) * 2007-04-11 2016-11-02 Canbas Co. Ltd. Compounds that abrogate the cell cycle g2 checkpoint for use in the treatment of cancer
EP3567035A1 (en) * 2007-04-11 2019-11-13 Canbas Co. Ltd. N-substituted 2,5-dioxo-azoline compounds for use in the treatment of cancer
WO2008128647A1 (en) * 2007-04-23 2008-10-30 Sanofi-Aventis Quinoline-carboxamide derivatives as p2y12 antagonists
US8669266B2 (en) 2007-04-23 2014-03-11 Sanofi Quinoline-carboxamide derivatives as P2Y12 antagonists
CN101663293B (en) * 2007-04-23 2013-07-31 塞诺菲-安万特股份有限公司 Quinoline-carboxamide derivatives as p2y12 antagonists
JP2010524984A (en) * 2007-04-23 2010-07-22 サノフィ−アベンティス Quinoline-carboxamide derivatives as P2Y12 antagonists
JP2010528027A (en) * 2007-05-18 2010-08-19 グラクソスミスクライン・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Quinoline derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
US8633187B2 (en) 2007-05-18 2014-01-21 Glaxosmithkline Llc Quinoline derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
EP2162131A4 (en) * 2007-05-18 2010-11-03 Glaxosmithkline Llc Quinoline derivatives as pi3 kinase inhibitors
US8138347B2 (en) 2007-05-18 2012-03-20 Glaxosmithkline Llc Quinoline derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
US8785433B2 (en) 2007-05-18 2014-07-22 Glaxosmithkline Llc Quinoline derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
US8404837B2 (en) 2007-05-18 2013-03-26 Glaxosmithkline Llc Quinoline derivatives as P13 kinase inhibitors
EP2596793A1 (en) * 2007-05-18 2013-05-29 Glaxosmithkline LLC Quinoline derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
WO2008144464A1 (en) * 2007-05-18 2008-11-27 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Quinoline derivatives as p13 kinase inhibitors
EP2162131A1 (en) * 2007-05-18 2010-03-17 GlaxoSmithKline LLC Quinoline derivatives as pi3 kinase inhibitors
JP2011502141A (en) * 2007-10-29 2011-01-20 ナトコ ファーマ リミテッド 4- (Tetrazol-5-yl) -quinazoline derivatives as anticancer agents
US9125937B2 (en) 2008-01-31 2015-09-08 Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale (Inserm) Labelled analogues of halobenzamides as multimodal radiopharmaceuticals and their precursors
EP2351743A1 (en) * 2008-10-27 2011-08-03 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Bicyclic compound
US8501804B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2013-08-06 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Bicyclic compound
EP2351743A4 (en) * 2008-10-27 2012-05-09 Takeda Pharmaceutical Bicyclic compound
WO2010059549A1 (en) * 2008-11-18 2010-05-27 Glaxosmithkline Llc Prolyl hydroxylase inhibitors
WO2010110689A1 (en) * 2009-03-23 2010-09-30 Andrzej Marciniak A novel medical use of kynurenic acid, its precursors and derivatives
US8633320B2 (en) 2009-05-05 2014-01-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for preparing bromo-substituted quinolines
WO2010129451A1 (en) * 2009-05-05 2010-11-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Process for preparing bromo-substituted quinolines
US20230046427A1 (en) * 2020-06-22 2023-02-16 Pmv Pharmaceuticals, Inc. METHODS AND COMPOUNDS FOR RESTORING MUTANT p53 FUNCTION
US11926632B2 (en) * 2020-06-22 2024-03-12 Pmv Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compounds for restoring mutant p53 function

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2009504753A (en) 2009-02-05
WO2007022241A3 (en) 2007-09-27
CA2619706A1 (en) 2007-02-22
JP4976394B2 (en) 2012-07-18
EP1931657A2 (en) 2008-06-18
CN101287727A (en) 2008-10-15
MX2008002363A (en) 2008-03-18
EP1931657B1 (en) 2013-12-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1931657B1 (en) Novel high affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands
US7446195B2 (en) High affinity thiophene-based and furan-based kinase ligands
ES2574782T3 (en) New pyrazolopyrimidines as cyclin dependent kinase inhibitors
EP1934225B1 (en) Pyrazolo [1,5-a] pyrimidines as protein kinase inhibitors
EP1934224B1 (en) Pyrazolopyrimidines as cyclin dependent kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
JP4790265B2 (en) Novel pyrazolopyrimidines as cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitors
US7511063B2 (en) High affinity quinoline-based kinase ligands
CA2706946A1 (en) 2-fluoropyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidines as protein kinase inhibitors
US20090175852A1 (en) Imidazopyrazines as protein kinase inhibitors
EP1940847A2 (en) Pyrazolopyrimidines as protein kinase inhibitors
WO2007041712A1 (en) Pyrazolopyrimidines as protein kinase inhibitors
WO2008130569A1 (en) Novel pyrazolopyrimidines as cyclin dependent kinase inhibitors
EP1931675A2 (en) Pyrazolo(1, 5a) pyrimidines as protein kinase inhibitors
JP2006502184A5 (en)
WO2007139732A1 (en) Pyrazolo [1, 5-a] pyrimidines as cdk inhibitors
WO2009097233A1 (en) Imidazopyrazines as protein kinase inhibitors
MXPA06009712A (en) Pyrazolotriazines as kinase inhibitors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200680038316.3

Country of ref document: CN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2619706

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008527091

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/a/2008/002363

Country of ref document: MX

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006801601

Country of ref document: EP

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 06801601

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2